Project Specifications - Ellisdale Construction

Transcription

Project Manual & Specifications
VestA Chesapeake, LLC
LEARNING CENTER CONVERSION
Avalon Apartments
Village at Chesapeake
Chesapeake Street and Southern Avenue
Washington, DC
Issued: March 15, 2010
Ow n er :
Vest A Ch esap eake, LLC
By:______________________________________________
Ar ch it ect :
Cr o sskey Ar ch it ect s LLC
By:______________________________________________
Co n t r act o r :
By:______________________________________________
Bo n d in g Co m p an y:
By:______________________________________________
Crosskey Architects LLC
Architecture, Planning and Interiors
One Union Place, Hartford, CT 06103 Phone: (860)724-3000 Fax: (860)724-3013
Specifications for Learning Center Conversion
Avalon Apartments, Washington, DC
SECTION 00012
PROJECT DIRECTORY/IDENTIFICATION OF PARTIES
PROJECT:
Learning Center Conversion
Avalon Apartments
Chesapeake St. SE
Washington, DC 20032
OWNER:
VestA Corporation, LLC
245 Hopmeadow Street
Weatogue, CT 06089
Phone: (860) 408-5400
ARCHITECT:
Crosskey Architects LLC
One Union Place
Hartford, CT 06103-1423
Phone: (860) 724-3000
MECHANICAL/
ELECTRICAL
ENGINEER:
Acorn Consulting Engineers, Inc.
Farms Village Plaza
244 Farms Village Road
P.O. Box 311
West Simsbury, CT 06092
Phone: (860) 651-1949
STRUCTURAL
ENGINEER:
James K. Grant Associates
30 Depot Street
P.O. Box 236
Collinsville, CT 06019
Phone: (860) 693-8403
00012-1
SECTION 00013
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION AND FORMS
00010
Title Page
00012
Project Directory/Identification of Parties
00013
Table of Contents
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01010
Summary of Work
01019
Contract Considerations
01039
Coordination & Meetings
01120
Alteration Project Procedures
01300
Submittals
01400
Quality Control
01500
Construction Facilities & Temporary Controls
01524
Construction Waste Management
01600
Material & Equipment
01650
Starting of Systems
01700
Contract Closeout
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
02072
Minor Demolition for Remodeling
02080
Piped Utilities – Basic Materials and Methods
02300
Earthwork
02751
Cement Concrete Pavement
02920
Lawns and Grasses
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03001
Concrete
03300
Cast in Place Concrete
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100
Mortar & Masonry Grout
04200
Masonry Unit
04300
Segmental Retaining Walls
04500
Masonry Restoration & Cleaning
04810
Unit Masonry Assemblies
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05500
Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 6 - CARPENTRY
06114
Wood Blocking & Curbing
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
07210
Building Insulation
00013-1
07270
07620
07900
Firestopping
Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim
Joint Sealers
DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS
08111
Standard Steel Doors
08112
Standard Steel Frames
08211
Flush Wood Doors
08305
Access Doors
08400
Entrances & Storefronts
08712
Door Hardware
08800
Glazing
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09260
Gypsum Board System
09511
Suspended Acoustical Tile Ceilings
09650
Resilient Flooring
09686
Carpeting with Cushion
09900
Painting
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10210
Metal Louvers
10441
Plastic Signs
10522
Fire Extinguisher and Accessories
10800
Toilet & Bath Accessories
10916
Closet Specialties
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11452
Appliances
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12390
Residential Casework
12512
Horizontal Louver Blinds
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15010
15100
15200
15300
15400
15500
15623
15671
15990
GENERAL PROVISIONS - MECHANICAL
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
INSULATION SYSTEMS
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
HVAC EQUIPMENT
FORCED AIR FURNACES WITH A/C
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
00013-2
16010
16012
16025
16100
16111
16120
16130
16141
16190
16195
16471
16491
16500
16536
16720
16921
16990
GENERAL PROVISIONS - ELECTRICAL
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
SEISMIC BRACING
CONDUIT
WIRE AND CABLE
BOXES
WIRING DEVICES
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PANELBOARDS
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
LIGHTING
SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS
END OF SECTION
00013-3
SECTION 00014
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Cover
LC-1.1
LC-2.1
LC-3.1
LC-4.1
Project Information, Drawing Index
Learning Center Demolition and Construction Plan
Learning Center Ceiling Plan & Schedules
Learning Center Construction Assemblies
Learning Center Door Schedule and Details
MLC-1.1
MLC-2.1
PFLC-1.1
LCE-1.1
HVAC Basement Plan
HVAC Schedules and Details
Plumbing & Fire Protection Floor Plans
Electrical Floor Plans
END OF SECTION
LIST OF DRAWINGS
00014 - 1
SECTION 01010
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Contract Description.
B.
Work Sequence.
1.2
CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A.
Contract Type: Stipulated Price as described in Document 00501.
1.3
WORK SEQUENCE
A.
Construct work to accommodate Owner’s occupancy requirements.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used.
END OF SECTION
01010-1
SECTION 01019
CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Inspection and testing allowances.
B.
Schedule of Values.
C.
Application for Payment.
D.
Change procedures.
E.
Defect Assessment.
F.
Measurement and Payment - Unit Prices.
G.
Alternates.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Owner - Contractor Agreement: Contract sum/price including allowances.
B.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Schedule of Values.
C.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions and alternates.
1.05
INSPECTION AND TESTING ALLOWANCES
A.
Costs Included in Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspection or testing firm, execution of
inspection or tests, reporting results.
B.
Costs Not Included in the Allowance:
1.
Incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspection or testing firm.
2.
Costs of testing laboratory services required by Contractor separate from
Contract Document requirements.
3.
Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by
Architect/Engineer.
C.
Payment Procedures:
1.
Submit one copy of the inspection or testing firm's invoice with next
application for payment.
2.
Pay invoice on approval by Architect/Engineer.
D.
Include the sum of $3,000.00 for payment of inspection and testing laboratory services
specified in Section 01400. Differences in cost will be adjusted by change order.
1.06
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment
Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be
considered.
B.
Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor
Agreement.
C.
Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with
number and title of the major specification Section. Identify bonds, insurance and site
mobilization costs.
D.
Include in each line item, the amount of each Allowance specified in this Section.
E.
Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment.
01019-1
1.07
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
B.
Submit five copies of each application on HUD Form 92448.
Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment.
1.08
CHANGE PROCEDURES
A.
The Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an
adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as authorized and will issue
supplemental instructions.
B.
The Architect/Engineer may issue a Proposal Request, which includes a detailed description
of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications, a change
in Contract Time for executing the change the period of time during which the requested
price will be considered valid. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within seven
days.
C.
The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the
Architect/Engineer, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a
statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and
Contract Time with full documentation in the form of unit costs and quantities for Material
and Labor. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600.
Stipulated Sum/Price Change Order: Based on Proposal Request and Contractor's
fixed price quotation.
Unit Price Change Order: For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the Change
Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. For unit costs or quantities of
units of work, which are not pre-determined, execute Work under a Construction
Change Authorization. Changes in Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time will be
computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order.
F.
Construction Change Authorization: Architect/Engineer may issue a directive, on AIA Form
G713 Construction Change Authorization signed by the Owner, instructing the Contractor to
proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Document
will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in
Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time. Promptly execute the change.
G.
Change Order Forms: AIA G701 Change Order.
H.
Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue change orders for signature of parties as
provided in the Conditions of the Contract.
1.09
DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A.
Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements.
B.
If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the
Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
1.10
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - UNIT PRICES
A.
Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in the individual specification sections.
B.
Take measurements and compute quantities. The Architect will verify measurements and
quantities.
C.
Unit Quantities: Quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for contract
purposes only. Actual quantities provided shall determine payment.
D.
Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant
and facilities, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of
an item of the Work; overhead and profit.
01019-2
E.
Unit Price Schedule: per Exhibit D.
1.11
ALTERNATES
A.
Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's
option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B.
Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required.
C.
Schedule of Alternates:
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01019-3
SECTION 01039
COORDINATION AND MEETINGS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Coordination.
B.
Field engineering
C.
Pre-construction conference.
D.
Site mobilization conference.
E.
Progress meetings.
F.
Pre-installation conferences.
1.03
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of Specifications to
assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B.
Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with
building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities
for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
C.
Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work, which are
indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and
conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
D.
In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E.
Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate sections in preparation for
Substantial Completion.
F.
After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective
Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of
Owner's activities.
1.04
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Connecticut and acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer.
B.
Contractor to locate and protect survey control and reference points.
C.
Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey as shown on
Drawings.
D.
Provide field engineering services. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing
recognized engineering survey practices.
E.
Submit a copy of registered site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor that the
elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents.
1.07
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
Owner will schedule a conference after Notice of Award.
B.
Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer and Contractor
C.
Agenda:
1.
Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
01039-1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates.
Distribution of Contract Documents.
Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and
progress schedule.
Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract, and the
Architect/Engineer.
Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications
for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures.
Scheduling.
1.08
SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE
A.
Owner will schedule a conference at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy.
B.
Attendance Required: Owner, Architect/Engineer, and Contractor, Contractor's
Superintendent and major Subcontractors.
C.
Agenda:
1.
Use of premises by Owner and Contractor.
2.
Owner's requirements.
3.
Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner.
4.
Temporary utilities provided by Owner.
5.
Survey and building layout.
6.
Security and housekeeping procedures.
7.
Schedules.
8.
Procedures for testing.
9.
Procedures for maintaining record documents.
10.
Requirements for start-up of equipment.
11.
Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
1.09
PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly
intervals.
B.
Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days to Architect/Engineer,
Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.
C.
Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner,
Architect/Engineer as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting.
D.
Agenda:
1.
Review minutes of previous meetings.
2.
Review of Work progress.
3.
Field observations, problems, and decisions.
4.
Identification of problems, which impede planned progress.
5.
Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
6.
Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
7.
Maintenance of progress schedule.
8.
Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
9.
Planned progress during succeeding work period.
10.
Coordination of projected progress.
11.
Maintenance of quality and work standards.
12.
Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
13.
Other business relating to Work.
01039-2
.10
PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A.
When required in individual specification Section, convene a pre-installation conference at
work site prior to commencing work of the Section.
B.
Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section.
C.
Notify Architect/Engineer four days in advance of meeting date.
D.
Prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within two days
after conference to participants, with two copies to Architect/Engineer.
E.
Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination
with related work.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01039-3
SECTION 01120
ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Products and installation for patching and extending Work.
B.
Transition and adjustments.
C.
Repair of damaged surfaces, finishes, and cleaning.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Work sequence, Owner occupancy,
Maintenance of utility services.
B.
Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings, Cutting and patching.
C.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary enclosures,
Protection of installed work, cleaning during construction.
D.
Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling: Removal and storage of products to be
reinstalled in this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING AND EXTENDING WORK
A.
New Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing Products and work for
patching and extending work.
B.
Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspection and testing Products where
necessary, referring to existing Work as a standard.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that demolition is complete, and areas are ready for installation of new Work.
B.
Beginning of restoration work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovation Work.
Replace and restore at completion.
B.
Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals,
and deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished Work.
C.
Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.
D.
Prepare surface and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work
and finishes.
E.
Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work and salvage items from weather
and extremes of temperature and humidity. Insulate ductwork and piping to prevent
condensation in exposed areas.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate work of alterations and renovations to expedite completion sequentially and to
01120-1
B.
C.
D.
E.
accommodate Owner occupancy.
Project & Finishes: Complete in all respects including operational mech./elec. work.
Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of
restoring Products and finishes to original or specified condition.
Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified
condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.
Install Products as specified in individual Sections.
3.04 TRANSITIONS
A.
Where new Work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.
Patched Work to match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance.
B.
When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible,
terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make
recommendation to Architect/Engineer.
3.05 ADJUSTMENTS
A.
Where removal of partitions or walls results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors,
walls, and ceilings to a smooth plane without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.
B.
Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a
smooth transition for Architect/Engineer review or request instructions from
Architect/Engineer.
C.
Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.
D.
Fit work at penetrations of surfaces.
3.06 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES
A.
Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces, which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or
showing other imperfections.
B.
Repair substrate prior to patching finish.
3.07 FINISHES
A.
Finish surfaces as specified in individual Product Sections.
B.
Finish patches to product uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be
matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.
3.08 CLEANING
A.
In addition to cleaning specified in Section 01500, clean Owner occupied areas of work.
END OF SECTION
01120-2
SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Submittal procedures.
B.
Construction progress schedules.
C.
Proposed Products list.
D.
Shop drawings.
E.
Product data.
F.
Samples.
G.
Manufacturers' instructions.
H.
Manufacturers' certificates.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers' field services and reports.
B.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract closeout submittals.
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
AGC (Associated General Contractors of America) publication "The Use of CPM in
Construction - A Manual for General Contractors and the Construction Industry".
1.04
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with Architect/Engineer accepted form.
B.
Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals to have original number with an
alphabetic suffix.
C.
Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail
number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate.
D.
Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products
required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is
in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
E.
Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to Architect/Engineer at business
address. Coordinate submission of related items.
F.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations, which may
be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
G.
Provide space for Contractor and Architect/Engineer review stamps.
H.
Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous
submittal.
I.
Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly
report any inability to comply with provisions.
1.05
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES
A.
Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor
Agreement for Architect/Engineer review.
B.
Revise and resubmit as required.
C.
Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since
previous version.
01300-1
D.
E.
F.
G.
Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first
work day of each week.
Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and
other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float
dates, and duration.
Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission.
Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product
delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner and under Allowances.
1.06
PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST
A.
Within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement submit complete list of major
products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number or
each product.
B.
For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or
catalog designation, and reference standards.
1.07
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit the number of opaque reproductions, which Contractor requires, plus two copies,
which will be retained by Architect/Engineer.
B.
After review, reproduce and distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and
for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.08
PRODUCT DATA
A.
Submit the number of copies, which the Contractor requires, plus three copies which will be
retained by the Architect/Engineer.
B.
Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement
manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project.
C.
After review, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies
for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
1.09
SAMPLES
A.
Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
B.
Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in
custom colors selected, textures, and patterns for Architect/Engineer's selection.
C.
Include identification on each sample, with full Project information.
D.
Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which
will be retained by Architect/Engineer.
E.
Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are indicated in individual specification
Sections.
1.10
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A.
When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in
quantities specified for Product Data.
B.
Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents.
1.11
MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A.
When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to
01300-2
B.
C.
Architect/Engineer for review, in quantities specified for Product Data.
Indicate material or Product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference date, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
(not used)
PART 3
EXECUTION
(not used)
END OF SECTION
01300-3
SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Quality assurance and control of installation.
B.
References.
C.
Field samples.
D.
Mock-up.
E.
Inspection and testing laboratory services.
F.
Manufacturers' field services and reports.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and Certificates.
B.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site conditions,
and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B.
Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C.
Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
from Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D.
Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except when more
stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more
precise workmanship.
E.
Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
F.
Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement.
G.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
1.04
REFERENCES
A.
Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids.
B.
Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents.
C.
Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification
for Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
D.
The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the
Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.
1.05
FIELD SAMPLES
A.
Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections for review.
B.
Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work.
C.
Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field
sample has been accepted by Architect/Engineer.
01400-1
1.06
MOCK-UP
A.
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the
respective product specification sections.
B.
Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
C.
Where mock-up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after mock-up
has been accepted by Architect/Engineer.
1.07
INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A.
Owner will appoint and employ services of an independent firm to perform inspection and
testing. Contractor shall pay for services from an allowance specified in Section 01019.
B.
The independent firm will perform inspections, tests, and other services specified in
individual specification Sections and as required by the Architect/Engineer.
C.
Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer, indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract
Documents.
D.
Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment,
tools, storage and assistance as requested.
1.
Notify Architect/Engineer and independent firm 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring services.
2.
Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional samples and tests
required for Contractor's use.
E.
Retesting required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
by the same independent firm on instructions by the Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall pay
for required retesting.
F.
Testing and source quality control may occur on or off the project site. Perform off-site
testing as required by the Architect or the Owner.
G.
Testing does not relieve Contractor to perform Work to contract requirements.
1.08
MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS
A.
Submit qualifications of observer to Architect/Engineer 30 days in advance of required
observations. Observer subject to approval of Architect/Engineer.
B.
When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and
balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
C.
Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or
installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
D.
Submit report within 30 days of observation to Architect/Engineer for review.
1.09
TOLERANCES
A.
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of Products to produce acceptable
Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with
Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C.
Adjust Products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing Products in place.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
(not used)
01400-2
PART 3
EXECUTION
(not used)
END OF SECTION
01400-3
SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, telephone service, water, and sanitary
facilities.
B.
Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, protection of the Work, and water control.
C.
Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, and project signage.
1.03
TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A.
Cost: By Contractor; Provide and pay for power service required from Utility source.
B.
Provide temporary electric feeder from electrical service at location as directed.
C.
Contractor will pay cost of energy used.
D.
Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes
located at each floor. Provide flexible power cords as required.
E.
Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location, feeder
switch at source distribution equipment.
F.
Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction.
G.
Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single-phase branch
circuits for power and lighting.
1.04
TEMPORARY LIGHTING
A.
Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a
minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft.
B.
Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for
security purposes.
C.
Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for
security purposes.
D.
Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,
pigtails, and lamps as required.
E.
Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
F.
Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction.
1.05
TEMPORARY HEAT
A.
Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for
construction operations.
B.
Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that
installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place.
Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or
consumed parts.
C.
Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) in areas where
construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications.
1.06
TEMPORARY VENTILATION
A.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
01500-1
1.07
TELEPHONE & FACSIMILE SERVICE
A.
Provide, maintain and pay for telephone and facsimile service to field office at time of
project mobilization.
1.08
TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A.
Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required.
B.
Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded
connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.
1.09
TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures.
1.10
BARRIERS
A.
Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing
facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
B.
Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.
C.
Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage.
D.
Provide temporary roofing as required.
1.12
WATER CONTROL
A.
Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain
pumping equipment.
B.
Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site
from soil erosion.
1.13
EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES
A.
Provide temporary insulated weather-tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate
acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating
and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification
Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with
self-closing hardware and locks.
B.
Provide temporary roofing as required.
1.15
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual
specification Sections.
B.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in
immediate work area to minimize damage.
C.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
D.
Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or
movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
E.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
F.
Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
1.16
SECURITY
A.
Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and operations from unauthorized entry,
01500-2
vandalism, or theft.
1.17
ACCESS ROADS
A.
Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve
construction area.
B.
Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded
traffic flow.
C.
Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
D.
Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
E.
Existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic.
1.18
PARKING
A.
Arrange for temporary parking to accommodate construction personnel.
B.
When site space is not adequate, provide additional off- site parking.
1.19
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and
orderly condition.
B.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed
or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C.
Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue
cleaning to eliminate dust.
D.
Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site.
1.20
PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Temporary Signs - Provide three (4) project signs of exterior grade plywood and wood frame
construction, painted, with die cut vinyl, self-adhesive letters and self-adhesive logo, to
Owner's and funding source’s design and colors.
B.
Erect on site at location established by Architect/Engineer.
C.
No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
1.21
FIELD OFFICES
A.
Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling and ventilating
equipment, and equipped with sturdy furniture drawing rack and drawing display table.
B.
Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
C.
Provide 1 office per site (4 total).
D.
Locate offices and sheds a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures.
1.22
REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A.
Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to
Substantial Completion inspection.
B.
Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet (600 mm). Grade site as
indicated.
C.
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D.
Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent
facilities used during construction to specified condition.
01500-3
PART 2
PRODUCTS
\\Not Used
PART 3
EXECUTION
\\Not Used
END OF SECTION
01500-4
SPECIFICATIONS FOR RENOVATIONS TO CHESAPEAKE VILLAGE – AVALON
WASHINGTON, DC
SECTION 01524 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Salvaging nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Division 1 Section "Summary of Multiple Contracts" for coordination of responsibilities
for waste management.
Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting from partial
demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition of
hazardous waste.
Division 2 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing
and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.
Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for disposal requirements for masonry
waste.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
D.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
E.
Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another
facility.
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT
01524 - 1
F.
1.4
WASHINGTON, DC
Salvage and Reuse:
Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent
incorporation into the Work.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of minimum 25 percent by weight
of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management
in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert
construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and
salvage of materials, including the following:
1.
Demolition Waste:
a.
Asphalt.
b.
Plant material.
c.
Concrete.
d.
Concrete reinforcing steel.
e.
Chain link fence.
f.
Metal stairs.
g.
Metal railings.
h.
Wood studs and boards.
i.
Plywood and oriented strand board.
j.
Wood trim and shutters.
k.
Fiberglass insulation.
l.
Rough hardware.
m.
Doors and frames.
n.
Door hardware.
o.
Windows.
p.
Glazing.
q.
Metal framed curtain wall.
r.
Gypsum board.
s.
Equipment.
t.
Cabinets and counters.
u.
Metal louvers and grilles.
v.
Metal bars over windows.
w.
Residential appliances.
x.
Plumbing fixtures.
y.
Piping.
z.
Supports and hangers.
aa. Valves.
bb. Mechanical equipment.
cc. Refrigerants.
dd. Electrical conduit.
ee. Copper wiring.
ff.
Lighting fixtures.
gg. Lamps.
hh. Ballasts.
ii.
Electrical devices.
jj.
Switchgear and panelboards.
kk. Transformers.
ll.
Satellite dishes.
01524 - 2
2.
Construction Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
Site-clearing waste.
Masonry and CMU.
Lumber.
Wood sheet materials.
Wood trim.
Metals.
Roofing.
Insulation.
Air barrier material.
Joint sealer.
Gypsum board.
Acoustic ceiling panels.
Resilient flooring.
Paint (if not useable as attic stock)
Piping.
Electrical conduit.
Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in paragraph above,
salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging
materials:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1.5
WASHINGTON, DC
Paper.
Cardboard.
Boxes.
Plastic sheet and film.
Polystyrene packaging.
Wood crates.
Plastic pails.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 15 days of date established for commencement of
the Work, on the Construction Waste Management Plan Form (attached).
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit
report. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification and Form CWM-2 for
demolition waste identification and include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Material category.
Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes).
Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).
Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes).
Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.
01524 - 3
WASHINGTON, DC
B.
Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated
end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated
by the Work.
C.
Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
D.
Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.
E.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
F.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with
requirements in Division 1 Section " Coordination & Meetings." Review methods and
procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.8
Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste
management coordinator.
Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its
disposition.
Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.
Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and
disposal facilities.
Review waste management requirements for each trade.
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A.
General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements of
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate
quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management
plan.
B.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition, and construction
waste generated by the Work. Use Form CWM-1 for construction waste and Form CWM-2 for
demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.
01524 - 4
C.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Use Form CWM-3 for construction waste and Form
CWM-4 for demolition waste. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of
waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
WASHINGTON, DC
Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this
Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the
Work.
Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location
on Project site where materials separation will be located.
Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste
management plan. Use Form CWM-5 for construction waste and Form CWM-6 for demolition
waste. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Total quantity of waste.
Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of
collection containers for each type of waste.
Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).
Revenue from salvaged materials.
Revenue from recycled materials.
Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.
Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.
Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of
waste.
Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
01524 - 5
1.
WASHINGTON, DC
Comply with Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for
operation, termination, and removal requirements.
B.
Waste Management Coordinator: Designate waste management coordinator from General
Contractor’s management team to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting
status of waste management work plan.
C.
Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.
1.
2.
D.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1.
2.
3.2
Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
Comply with Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls” for
controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted to be kept on Project site.
B.
Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clean salvaged items.
Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
C.
Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave
door hardware attached to doors.
D.
Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect
equipment from exposure to weather.
E.
Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
F.
Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
G.
Electrical Devices:
Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters,
panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.
01524 - 6
3.3
WASHINGTON, DC
RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for
recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.
C.
Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
D.
Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate
recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved
construction waste management plan.
1.
Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials
at each container and bin.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
if found.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Grind asphalt to maximum 1-1/2-inch.
1.
B.
Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
1.
2.
C.
Crush asphaltic concrete paving and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2
Section "Earthwork" for use as general fill.
Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.
Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section
"Earthwork" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase.
Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other
metals.
1.
Pulverize masonry to maximum 1-inch size.
a.
Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section
"Earthwork" for use as general fill.
01524 - 7
b.
2.
WASHINGTON, DC
Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Division 2 Section
"Exterior Plants" for use as mineral mulch.
Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
D.
Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber,
engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.
E.
Metals: Separate metals by type.
1.
2.
Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
F.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.
G.
Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports,
hangers, valves, and other components by type and size.
H.
Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
3.5
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A.
Packaging:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees on-site.
1.
C.
Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants" for use of chipped
organic waste as organic mulch.
Wood Materials:
1.
2.
D.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location.
1.
Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper
or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.
01524 - 8
a.
3.6
WASHINGTON, DC
Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Exterior Plants." for use of clean
ground gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7
ATTACHMENTS
A.
Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification.
B.
Form CWM-2 for demolition waste identification.
C.
Form CWM-3 for construction waste reduction work plan.
D.
Form CWM-4 for demolition waste reduction work plan.
E.
Form CWM-5 cost/revenue analysis of construction waste reduction work plan.
F.
Form CWM-6 cost/revenue analysis of demolition waste reduction work plan.
G.
Form CWM-7 for construction waste
H.
Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.
END OF SECTION 01524
01524 - 9
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Products.
B.
Transportation and handling.
C.
Storage and protection.
D.
Product options.
E.
Substitutions.
A.
Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures.
B.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Product quality monitoring.
1.03 PRODUCTS
A.
Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems
forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,
fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing
materials or components required for reuse.
B.
Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Promptly inspect shipments to assure that Products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and Products are undamaged.
C.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
Store & protect Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals & labels
intact & legible. Store sensitive Products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures.
B.
For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground.
C.
Provide off-site storage/protection when site does not permit on-site storage/protection.
D.
Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation
to avoid condensation.
E.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Provide mixing
with foreign matter.
F.
Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
G.
Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure
Products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions.
1.06 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any Product meeting
those standards or description.
01600-1
B.
C.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers
named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for
Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Architect/Engineer will consider requests for Substitutions only within 15 days after date of
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
B.
Substitutions may be considered when a Product becomes unavailable through no fault of the
Contractor.
C.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed
Substitution with Contract Documents.
D.
A request constitutes a representation that the Contractor:
1.
Has investigated proposed Product and determined that it meets or exceeds the
quality level of the specified Product.
2.
Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified Product.
3.
Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work, which may be
required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
4.
Waives claims for additional costs or time extension, which may subsequently
become apparent.
5.
Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re-approval
by authorities.
E.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
revision to the Contract Documents.
F.
Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1.
Submit three copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request
to one proposed Substitution.
2.
Submit shop drawings, Product data, and certified test results attesting to the
proposed Product equivalence.
3.
The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\Not used
END OF SECTION
01600-2
SECTION 01650
STARTING OF SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Starting systems.
B.
Demonstration and instructions.
C.
Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports.
B.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra
materials.
1.03 STARTING SYSTEMS
A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B.
Notify Architect/Engineer and Owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.
C.
Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions, which may cause damage.
D.
Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those
required by the equipment or system manufacturer.
E.
Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F.
Execute start-up under supervision of responsible Contractors' personnel in accordance with
manufacturers' instructions.
G.
When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide
authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or
system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in
operation.
H.
Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01400 that equipment or system has been
properly installed and is functioning correctly.
1.04 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior
to date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Demonstrate Project equipment instructed by a qualified manufacturers' representative who
is knowledgeable about the Project.
C.
For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
D.
Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of
manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
E.
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing,
maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled times, at equipment
location.
F.
Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for
additional data becomes apparent during instruction.
01650-1
1.05 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
A.
Contractor will employ services of an independent firm to perform testing and adjusting.
Contractor shall pay for services.
B.
Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Architect/Engineer indicating
observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified
requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\Not Used
END OF SECTION
01650-2
SECTION 01700
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Closeout Procedures.
B.
Final Cleaning.
C.
Adjusting.
D.
Project Record Documents.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data.
F.
Warranties.
G.
Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials.
A.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning.
B.
Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing.
1.03 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been
inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Architect/Engineer's inspection.
B.
Provide submittals to Architect/Engineer and Owner that are required by governing or other
authorities.
C.
Submit all warranties for Roofing, siding Windows, Doors, Caulking Glazing, Appliances,
carpets, resilient flooring, Mechanical & electrical fixtures and equipment.
D.
Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
1.04 FINAL CLEANING
A.
Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection.
B.
Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels,
stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and
soft surfaces.
C.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
D.
Replace filters of operating equipment.
E.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F.
Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
G
Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site.
1.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the
Work:
1.
Contract Drawings.
01700-1
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
2.
Specifications.
3.
Addenda.
4.
Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract.
5.
Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples.
Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction.
Record information concurrent with construction progress.
Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual
Products installed, including the following:
1.
Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2.
Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3.
Changes made by Addenda and Modifications.
Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual
construction including:
1.
Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum.
2.
Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and
appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.
3.
Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
4.
Field changes of dimension and detail.
5.
Details not on original Contract Drawings.
Delete Architect/Engineer title block and seal from all documents.
Submit documents to Architect/Engineer with claim for final Application for Payment.
1.07 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit one set prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 279 mm) text
pages, three D side ring capacity expansion binders with durable plastic covers.
B.
Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are
required.
C.
Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as
described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.
D.
Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system
description identified, type on 30 pound white paper.
Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect/Engineer,
Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
1.
Significant design criteria.
2.
List of equipment.
3.
Parts list for each component.
4.
Operating instructions.
5.
Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems.
6.
Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
1.
Shop drawings and product data.
2.
Air and water balance reports.
3.
Certificates.
01700-2
E.
F.
4.
Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
Submit one copy of completed volumes in final form 15 days prior to final inspection. This
copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect/Engineer comments. Revise
content of documents as required prior to final submittal.
Submit final volumes revised, within ten days after final inspection.
1.08 WARRANTIES
A.
Provide notarized copies.
B.
Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers.
C.
Provide Table of Contents and assemble in three D side ring binder with durable plastic
cover.
D.
Submit prior to final Application for Payment.
E.
For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated
submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty
period.
1.09 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification Sections.
B.
Deliver to Project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
\\Not used
PART 3 EXECUTION
\\Not used
END OF SECTION
01700-3
SECTION 02072
MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Remove designated building equipment and fixtures.
B.
Remove designated partitions and components.
C.
Cap and identify utilities.
D.
Remove all materials necessary to complete the scope of work as shown in the contract
documents.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 01120 - Alteration Project Procedures: Re- installation of removed materials.
B.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary barriers and
enclosures.
C.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Security.
D.
Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Cleaning during
construction.
E.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule under provisions of Section 01300.
1.04 EXISTING CONDITIONS
A.
Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas. Maintain
protected egress and access at all times.
B.
Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings as specified in Section
01500.
B.
Protect existing items, which are not indicated to be altered.
C.
Disconnect, remove, and cap designated utility services within demolition areas.
D.
Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify and indicate capping locations on Project
Record Documents.
3.02 EXECUTION
A.
Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing construction to remain.
B.
Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.
C.
Relics, antiques, and similar objects remain the property of the Owner. Notify Architect
prior to removal and obtain acceptance regarding method of removal.
02072-1
D.
E.
F.
G.
Remove materials to be re-installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and
protect under provisions of Section 01600.
Remove and promptly dispose of contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials
encountered.
Do not burn or bury materials on site.
Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave
areas of work in clean condition.
END OF SECTION
02072-2
SECTION 02080
PIPED UTILITIES - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
System Description: Piped utilities outside the building.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding Qualifications: AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
B.
Steel Piping Welding Qualifications: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
C.
Lettering and Colors of Identification Devices: ASME A13.1.
1.3
MATERIALS
A.
Transition Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Dielectric Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Dielectric unions.
Dielectric flanges.
Dielectric-flange kits.
Dielectric couplings.
Dielectric nipples.
Sleeves:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Transition couplings.
Transition fittings.
Transition unions.
Flexible transition couplings.
Galvanized-steel sheet.
Steel pipe.
Cast iron.
Molded PVC.
PVC pipe.
Molded PE.
Identification Devices:
1.
2.
3.
Equipment nameplates.
Stencils.
Snap-on plastic pipe markers.
02080-1
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Pressure-sensitive pipe markers.
Plastic tape.
Valve tags.
Engraved plastic-laminate signs.
Plastic equipment markers.
Plasticized tags.
E.
Grout: Nonshrink; nonmetallic.
F.
Flowable Fill: Low-strength concrete, flowable-slurry mix.
END OF SECTION
02080-2
SECTION 02300
EARTHWORK
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, pavements, turf and grasses, and low retaining walls.
B.
Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.
C.
Subbase course for concrete pavements.
D.
Subsurface drainage backfill for retaining walls and trenches.
E.
Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and new plumbing within existing building.
1.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
Blasting: Where explosives are allowed, seismographic monitoring provided by independent seismic
survey agency during blasting operations.
MATERIALS
A.
Soil Materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Satisfactory Soils: Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487.
Unsatisfactory Soils: Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to
ASTM D 2487.
Subbase Material: Graded mixture of gravel, crushed stone, and sand with 90 percent passing a 11/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
Base Course: Graded mixture of gravel, crushed stone, and sand with 95 percent passing a 1-1/2inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
Engineered Fill: Graded mixture of gravel, crushed stone, and sand with 90 percent passing a 11/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
Bedding Course: Graded mixture of gravel, crushed stone, and sand with 100 percent passing a 1inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.
Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone or gravel, coarse-aggregate grading
Size 57.
Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand, coarseaggregate grading Size 67.
Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.
Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture.
B.
Geotextiles: Subsurface drainage geotextile and separation geotextile.
C.
Controlled Low-Strength Material: Conventional weight concrete with 140 psi (965 kPa) compressive
strength.
D.
Warning Tape: Detectable, polyethylene film.
EARTHWORKS
02300 - 1
1.4
EXCAVATION
A.
Explosives: Not allowed.
B.
Hand-excavate in tree- and plant-protection zones.
C.
Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials: Satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's
property; waste materials and unsatisfactory soil off Owner's property.
1.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Special Inspector and Testing Agency: Owner engaged.
END OF SECTION
EARTHWORKS
02300 - 2
SECTION 02751
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Patio
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.3
Quality Standard: ACI 301 (ACI 301M).
MATERIALS
A.
Reinforcement:
1.
B.
Concrete:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain steel.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray.
Normal-weight aggregate.
Air-entraining admixture.
Color pigment.
Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days.
FINISHING AND CURING
A.
Finishes: Slip-resistive aggregate finish.
B.
Cure concrete by moisture curing or moisture-retaining-cover curing.
1.5
A.
Testing: By Owner-engaged agency.
END OF SECTION
CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02751 - 1
SECTION 02920
LAWNS AND GRASSES
1.14
SUMMARY
A.
Seeded turf.
B.
Turf renovation.
C.
Erosion-control materials.
1.15
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer's Personnel Certifications: Certified Landscape Technician, CLT-Exterior.
B.
Soil analysis of each unamended soil type.
1.16
A.
1.17
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Turf: 60 days from date of Substantial Completion.
MATERIALS
A.
Seed: to match existing.
B.
Planting Soils: ASTM D 5268 topsoil, amended with inorganic and organic soil amendments and
fertilizers in specified quantities.
C.
Mulches: straw mulch or as specified by Owner.
D.
Erosion-Control Materials: Mats.
1.18
INSTALLATION
A.
Planting Soil Depth for Newly Graded Subgrades: 4 inches (100 mm).
B.
Surface Soil Enrichment Depth for Unchanged Subgrades: 4 inches (100 mm).
C.
Seeding Method: Sow.
D.
Protect seeded areas with straw mulch.
END OF SECTION
02920-1
SECTION 03001
CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage.
B.
Concrete reinforcement and accessories.
C.
Cast-in-place concrete.
D.
Concrete walks.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications of Structural Concrete for Buildings.
B.
ACI 318-89 - Building Code Requirements for Cast in Place Concrete.
C.
ANSI/ASTM A185 - Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
D.
ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.
E.
ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
F.
ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
G.
ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
H.
ASTM D2103 - Polyethylene Film and Sheeting.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Maintain copy of ACI 301 on site.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable codes.
1.07 TESTS
A.
B.
C.
Testing and analysis of concrete will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
Submit proposed mix design to appointed firm for review prior to commencement of work.
Submit shop drawings for reinforcement.
Testing firm will take cylinders and perform slump tests in accordance with ACI 301.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A.
Conform to ACI 301.
B.
Plywood Forms: Douglas Fir species; solid one grade; sound undamaged sheets.
C.
Lumber: spruce; utility grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
D.
Tubular Column Type: Round, spirally wound laminated fiber material; inside surface
treated with release agent.
E.
Form Ties: Snap-off metal, of fixed length, cone ends.
2.02 REINFORCING STEEL
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, 60 ksi yield grade billet steel deformed bars.
B.
Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain steel.
03001-1
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150, normal - Type 1 Portland, gray color.
B.
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C.
Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Vapor Barrier: ASTM D2103, 6-mil thick clear polyethylene film.
B.
Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound with non-metallic aggregate, cement, water
reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi.
C.
Form Release Agent: Colorless material, which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture.
2.06 CURING MATERIALS
A.
Water: Clean and drinkable.
B.
Polyethylene Film: ASTM D2103, 6 mil (0.15 mm) thick, clear color.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX
A.
Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B.
Foundation Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength
(28 days): 3000 psi
2. Slump:
3 to 5 inch
C.
Concrete Exposed to Weather:
(28 days): 4000 psi
2. Slump:
3 to 5 inch
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FORMWORK ERECTION
A.
Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork.
B.
Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms; remove loose dirt.
C.
Align form joints.
D.
Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces receive or applied coatings, which
may be affected by agent.
E.
Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
3.02 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting
operations.
B.
Install vapor barrier under interior floor slabs on fill. Lap joints minimum 6 inches (150
mm) and seal. Do not disturb vapor barrier while placing reinforcement.
3.04 FLOOR SLABS
A.
Place floor slabs where indicated on Drawings.
03001-2
B.
C.
Separate slabs on fill from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom
of slab to within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of finished slab surface.
Steel trowel finish surfaces.
3.05 TOLERANCES
A.
Provide Class B tolerance to floor slabs according to ACI 301. Pitch to drains 1/4 inch per
foot (20 mm/m) nominal.
3.07 SCHEDULE OF FORMED SURFACES
A.
Rough form finish at all concrete wall surfaces.
3.08 SCHEDULE OF FLOOR SLAB FINISHES
A.
Steel trowel finish at floor slabs and dumpster pads.
B.
Broom finish at exterior sidewalks.
END OF SECTION
03001-3
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Cast-in-place concrete foundation walls, footings and slabs.
B.
Control, expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including
joint sealants.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork: Formwork and accessories.
B.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
C.
Section 05510 – Metal Stairs
D.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ACI 211.1 - Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete.
B.
ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
C.
ACI 302 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
D.
ACI 304 - Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing
Concrete.
E.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting.
F.
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting.
G.
ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.
H.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
I.
ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
J.
ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
K.
ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
L.
ASTM C260 - Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
M.
ASTM C494 - Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
N.
ASTM D994 - Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type).
O.
ASTM D1190 - Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Poured Elastic Type.
P.
ASTM D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).
Q.
ASTM D1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction.
1.5
SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories.
C.
Samples: Submit two, 6 inch long samples of expansion/contraction joint and control joint.
1.6
SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface
required with adjacent Work.
03300-1
1.7
SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Operation and Maintenance Data, Warranties and
Bonds, Procedures for submittals.
B.
Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are
concealed from view.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301.
C.
Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work.
D.
Conform to ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
E.
Conform to ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type.
B.
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C.
Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Bonding Agent: Polymer resin emulsion.
B.
Vapor Retarder: 6 mil thick clear polyethylene film.
C.
Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water
reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of
2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days.
2.4
JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS
A.
Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/4 inch thick;
tongue and groove profile.
2.5
CONCRETE MIX
A.
Mix concrete in accordance with ACI 304. Deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94.
B.
Select proportions for normal weight concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Method 1.
C.
Provide concrete to the following criteria:
D.
Foundation Concrete:
(28 days): 3000 psi
2. Slump:
3 to 5 inch
E.
Concrete Exposed to Weather:
(28 days): 4000 psi
2. Slump:
3 to 5 inch
F.
Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.
G.
Use calcium chloride only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
H.
Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer.
I.
Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior.
03300-2
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement.
C.
Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are
accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete,
insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
C.
Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement
of form accessories.
3.3
PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Notify Architect/Engineer minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of operations.
C.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed expansion and contraction joints, are
not disturbed during concrete placement.
D.
Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and seal
watertight by taping edges and ends.
E.
Repair vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor
retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
F.
Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch thick joint filler.
G.
Place joint filler in floor slab. Set top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by
wet concrete.
H.
Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/8 inch of finished slab surface. Conform
to Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements.
N.
Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature,
and test samples taken.
O.
Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction
joints.
P.
Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
Q.
Place floor slabs in checkerboard or saw cut pattern indicated.
R.
Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/4 depth
of slab thickness.
S.
Screed floors and slabs on grade level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in
10 ft.
3.5
CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
Provide formed concrete surfaces to be left exposed, concrete walls, columns, beams with
smooth rubbed finish.
B.
Steel trowel surfaces which will receive carpeting and resilient flooring.
C.
Steel trowel interior surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.
D.
Broom finish exterior surfaces which are scheduled to be exposed.
E.
In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to
drains as indicated on drawings.
03300-3
3.6
CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
C.
Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
D.
Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas continuously for 4
days.
E.
Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days.
3.7
A.
Section 01400 - Quality Assurance: Field inspection, testing.
B.
Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm.
C.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for
review prior to commencement of Work.
D.
Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified
requirements.
E.
Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 100 or less cu yds of each class of
concrete placed.
F.
One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting, cured on job site
under same conditions as concrete it represents.
G.
One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken.
3.8
PATCHING
A.
Allow Architect/Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms.
B.
Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify
Architect/Engineer upon discovery.
C.
Patch imperfections as directed and in accordance with ACI 301.
3.9
DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions,
tolerances or specified requirements.
B.
Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect/Engineer.
C.
Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express
direction of Architect/Engineer for each individual area.
3.08 SCHEDULE OF FLOOR SLAB FINISHES
A.
Steel trowel finish at floor slabs.
B.
Broom finish at exterior sidewalks.
END OF SECTION
03300-4
SECTION 04300
SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01
Description
A.
Work includes furnishing and installing segmental retaining wall (SRW) units to the lines and grades
designated on the project’s final construction drawings or as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Also
included is furnishing and installing appurtenant materials required for construction of the retaining wall as
shown on the construction drawings.
1.02
Reference Standards
A. Segmental Retaining Wall Units
1. ASTM C 1372
- Standard Specification for Segmental Retaining Wall Units
2. ASTM C 140 - Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Geosynthetic Reinforcement
ASTM D 4595
- Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide-Width Strip Method
ASTM D 5262
- Test Method for Evaluating the Unconfined Creep Behavior of Geosynthetics
GRI:GG1
- Single Rib Geogrid Tensile Strength
GRI:GG5
- Geogrid Pullout
C. Soils
1. ASTM D 698 - Moisture Density Relationship for Soils, Standard Method
2. ASTM D 422
- Gradation of Soils
3. ASTM D 424 - Atterberg Limits of Soil
D. Drainage Pipe
1. ASTM D 3034 - Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe
2. ASTM D 1248 - Specification for Corrugated Plastic Pipe
E.
Engineering Design
1.
“NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls”, Second Edition
F. Where specifications and reference documents conflict, the Architect/Engineer shall make the final
determination of applicable document.
1.03
Submittals
A. Material Submittals: The Contractor shall submit manufacturers' certifications two weeks prior to start of work
stating that the SRW units and geosynthetic reinforcement meet the requirements of Section 2 of this
specification.
B. Design Submittal: The Contractor shall submit two sets of detailed design calculations and final retaining wall
plans for approval at least two weeks prior to the beginning of wall construction. All calculations and
drawings shall be prepared and sealed by a professional Civil Engineer (P.E.) – (Wall Design Engineer)
04300-1
experienced in SRW design and licensed in the state where the wall is to be built.
1.04
Delivery, Storage and Handling
A. Contractor shall check materials upon delivery to assure that specified type and grade of materials have been
received and proper color and texture of SRW units have been received.
B. Contractor shall prevent excessive mud, wet concrete, epoxies, and like materials that may affix themselves,
from coming in contact with materials.
C. Contractor shall store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Contractor shall protect materials from damage. Damaged materials shall not be incorporated into the retaining
wall.
PART 2: MATERIALS
2.01
Segmental Retaining Wall Units
A.
SRW units shall be machine formed, Portland Cement concrete blocks specifically designed for retaining
wall applications. SRW units currently approved for this project are:
VERSA-LOK Retaining Wall Units as manufactured by VERSA-LOK Retaining Wall Systems.
B. Color of SRW units shall be selected by Owner.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
O.
2.02
C. Finish of SRW units shall be split face.
D. SRW unit faces shall be of straight geometry.
E. SRW unit height shall be six inches.
F. SRW units (not including aggregate fill in unit voids) shall provide a minimum weight of 105 psf
wall face area.
G. SRW units shall be solid through the full depth of the unit.
H. SRW units shall have a depth (front face to rear) to height ratio of 2:1, minimum.
SRW units shall be interlocked with connection pins, designed with proper setback to provide 8:1
vertical to horizontal batter (a 7 degree cant from vertical).
SRW units shall be capable of being erected with the horizontal gap between adjacent units not
exceeding 1/8 inches.
SRW units shall be capable of providing overlap of units on each successive course so that walls
meeting at corner are interlocked and continuous. SRW units that require corners to be mitered shall
not be allowed.
SRW units shall be capable of providing a split face, textured surface for all vertical surfaces that will be
exposed after completion of wall, including any exposed sides and backs of units.
SRW units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing
of the unit or significantly impair the strength or permanence of the structure. Cracking or excessive
chipping may be grounds for rejection. Units showing cracks longer than 1/2" shall not be used
within the wall. Units showing chips visible at a distance of 30 feet from the wall shall not be used
within the wall.
Concrete used to manufacture SRW units shall have a minimum 28 days compressive strength of 3,000
psi and a maximum moisture absorption rate, by weight, of 8% as determined in accordance with
ASTM C1372. Compressive strength test specimens shall conform to the saw-cut coupon provisions
of ASTM C140.
SRW units' molded dimensions shall not differ more than + 1/8 inch from that specified, in accordance
with ASTM C1372.
Segmental Retaining Wall Unit Connection Pins
A.
SRW units shall be interlocked with VERSA-Tuff connection pins. The pins shall consist of glass-reinforced
nylon made for the expressed use with the SRW units supplied.
04300-2
2.03
Geosynthetic Reinforcement
A.
Geosynthetic reinforcement shall consist of geogrids or geotextiles manufactured as a soil reinforcement
element. The manufacturers/suppliers of the geosynthetic reinforcement shall have demonstrated
construction of similar size and types of segmental retaining walls on previous projects.
The geosynthetic type must be approved one week prior to bid opening. Geosynthetic types currently
approved for this project are:
VERSA-Grid Geogrids
B.
2.04
The type, strength, and placement location of the reinforcing geosynthetic shall be as determined by the
Wall Design Engineer, as shown on the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plans.
Leveling Pad
A.
2.05
Material for leveling pad shall consist of compacted sand, gravel, or combination thereof (USCS soil
types GP,GW, SP, & SW) and shall be a minimum of 6 inches in depth. Lean concrete with a
strength of 200-300 psi and three inches thick maximum may also be used as a leveling pad material.
The leveling pad should extend laterally at least a distance of 6 inches from the toe and heel of the
lowermost SRW unit.
Drainage Aggregate
A.
Drainage aggregate shall be angular, clean stone or granular fill meeting the following gradation as
determined in accordance with ASTM D422
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
1 inch
3/4 inch
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
2.06
100
75-100
0-60
0-50
0-5
Drainage Pipe
A.
The drainage collection pipe shall be a perforated or slotted PVC, or corrugated HDPE pipe. The
drainage pipe may be wrapped with a geotextile to function as a filter.
B.
Drainage pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3034 and/or ASTM D 1248
2.07
Reinforced (Infill) Soil
A.
The reinforced soil material shall be free of debris. Unless otherwise noted on the final, P.E. sealed,
retaining wall plans prepared by the Wall Design Engineer, the reinforced material shall consist of the
inorganic USCS soil types GP, GW, SW, SP, SM, meeting the following gradation, as determined in
accordance with ASTM D422:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
04300-3
4 inch
No. 4
No. 40
No. 200
100
20-100
0-60
0-35
B.
The maximum particle size of poorly-graded gravels (GP) (no fines) should not exceed 3/4 inch unless
expressly approved by the Wall Design Engineer and the long-term design strength (LTDS) of the
geosynthetic is reduced to account for additional installation damage from particles larger than this
maximum.
C.
The plasticity of the fine fraction shall be less than 20.
PART 3: DESIGN PARAMETERS
3.01
Design
A.
The design analysis for the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plans prepared by the Wall Design Engineer shall
consider the external stability against sliding and overturning, internal stability, and facial stability of the
reinforced soil mass and shall be in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and these
specifications. The internal and external stability analysis shall be performed in accordance with the
“NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls”, using the recommended minimum factors of
safety in this manual.
B.
While vertical spacing between geogrid layers may vary, it shall not exceed 2.0 feet maximum in the wall
design.
CD. The geosynthetic placement in the wall design shall have 100 percent continuous coverage parallel to the
wall face. Gapping between horizontally adjacent layers of geosynthetic (partial coverage) will not be
allowed.
PART 4:CONSTRUCTION
4.01
Inspection
A.
The Owner or Owner's Representative is responsible for verifying that the Contractor meets all the
requirements of the specification. This includes all submittals for materials and design, qualifications,
and proper installation of wall system.
B.
Contractor's field construction supervisor shall have demonstrated experience and be qualified to direct
all work at the site.
4.02
Excavation
A.
Contractor shall excavate to the lines and grades shown on the project grading plans. Contractor shall
take precautions to minimize over-excavation. Over-excavation shall be filled with compacted infill
material, or as directed by the Engineer/Architect, at the Contractor's expense.
B.
Contractor shall verify location of existing structures and utilities prior to excavation. Contractor shall
ensure all surrounding structures are protected from the effects of wall excavation. Excavation
support, if required, is the responsibility of the Contractor
04300-4
4.03
Foundation Preparation
A.
Following the excavation, the foundation soil shall be examined by the Owner's Engineer to assure actual
foundation soil strength meets or exceeds the assumed design bearing strength. Soils not meeting the
required strength shall be removed and replaced with infill soils, as directed by the Owner's Engineer.
B.
Foundation soil shall be proofrolled and compacted to 95% standard Proctor density and inspected by
the Owner's Engineer prior to placement of leveling pad materials.
4.04
Leveling Pad Construction
A.
Leveling pad shall be placed as shown on the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plans with a minimum
thickness of 6 inches. The leveling pad should extend laterally at least a distance of 6 inches from the
toe and heel of the lower most SRW unit.
B.
Granular leveling pad material shall be compacted to provide a firm, level bearing surface on which to
place the first course of units. Well-graded sand can be used to smooth the top 1/4 to 1/2 inch of the
leveling pad. Compaction will be with mechanical plate compactors to achieve 95% of maximum
standard Proctor density (ASTM D 698).
4.05
4.06
SRW Unit Installation
A.
All SRW units shall be installed at the proper elevation and orientation as shown on the final, P.E. sealed
wall plans and details or as directed by the Wall Design Engineer. The SRW units shall be installed
in general accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The specifications and drawings
shall govern in any conflict between the two requirements.
B.
First course of SRW units shall be placed on the leveling pad. The units shall be leveled side-to-side,
front-to-rear and with adjacent units, and aligned to ensure intimate contact with the leveling pad.
The first course is the most important to ensure accurate and acceptable results. No gaps shall be left
between the front of adjacent units. Alignment may be done by means of a string line or offset from
base line to the back of the units.
C.
All excess debris shall be cleaned from top of units and the next course of units installed on top of the
units below.
D.
Two VERSA-Tuff connection pins shall be inserted through the pin holes of each upper course unit into
receiving slots in lower course units. Pins shall be fully seated in the pin slot below. Units shall be
pushed forward to remove any looseness in the unit-to-unit connection.
E.
Prior to placement of next course, the level and alignment of the units shall be checked and corrected,
where needed.
F.
Layout of curves and corners shall be installed in accordance with the wall plan details or in general
accordance with SRW manufacturer's installation guidelines. Walls meeting at corners shall be
interlocked by overlapping successive courses.
G.
Procedures C. through F. shall be repeated until reaching top of wall units, just below the height of the
cap units. Geosynthetic reinforcement, drainage materials, and reinforced backfill shall be placed in
sequence with unit installation as described in Section 4.06, 4.07, and 4.08.
Geosynthetic Reinforcement Placement
04300-5
A.
All geosynthetic reinforcement shall be installed at the proper elevation and orientation as shown on the
final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plan profiles and details, or as directed by the Wall
Design Engineer.
B.
At the elevations shown on the final plans, (after the units, drainage material, and backfill have been
placed to this elevation) the geosynthetic reinforcement shall be laid horizontally on compacted infill
and on top of the concrete SRW units, to within one inch of the front face of the unit below.
Embedment of the geosynthetic in the SRW units shall be consistent with SRW manufacturer's
recommendations. Correct orientation of the geosynthetic reinforcement shall be verified by the
Contractor to be in accordance with the geosynthetic manufacturer's recommendations. The highest
strength direction of the geosynthetic must be perpendicular to the wall face.
C.
Geosynthetic reinforcement layers shall be one continuous piece for their entire embedment length.
Splicing of the geosynthetic in the design strength direction (perpendicular to the wall face) shall not
be permitted. Along the length of the wall, horizontally adjacent sections of geosynthetic
reinforcement shall be butted in a manner to assure 100 percent coverage parallel to the wall face.
D.
Tracked construction equipment shall not be operated directly on the geosynthetic reinforcement. A
minimum of 6 inches of backfill is required prior to operation of tracked vehicles over the
geosynthetic. Turning should be kept to a minimum. Rubber-tired equipment may pass over the
geosynthetic reinforcement at slow speeds (less than 5 mph).
E.
The geosynthetic reinforcement shall be free of wrinkles prior to placement of soil fill. The nominal
tension shall be applied to the reinforcement and secured in place with staples, stakes or by hand
tensioning until reinforcement is covered by six inches of fill.
4.07
Drainage Materials
A.
Drainage aggregate shall be installed to the line, grades, and sections shown on the final P.E. sealed
retaining wall plans. Drainage aggregate shall be placed to the minimum thickness shown on the
construction plans between and behind units (a minimum of one cubic foot for each exposed square
foot of wall face unless otherwise noted on the final wall plans).
B.
Drainage collection pipes shall be installed to maintain gravity flow of water outside the reinforced soil
zone. The drainage collection pipe shall daylight into a storm sewer or along a slope, at an elevation
lower than the lowest point of the pipe within the aggregate drain.
4.08
Backfill Placement
A.
The reinforced backfill shall be placed as shown in the final wall plans in the maximum compacted lift
thickness of 10 inches and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of standard Proctor density
(ASTM D 698) at a moisture content within 2% of optimum. The backfill shall be placed and spread
in such a manner as to eliminate wrinkles or movement of the geosynthetic reinforcement and the
SRW units.
B.
Only hand-operated compaction equipment shall be allowed within 3 feet of the back of the wall units.
Compaction within the 3 feet behind the wall units shall be achieved by at least three (3) passes of a
lightweight mechanical tamper, plate, or roller.
C.
At the end of each day's operation, the Contractor shall slope the last level of backfill away from the wall
facing and reinforced backfill to direct water runoff away from the wall face.
04300-6
D.
4.09
At completion of wall construction, backfill shall be placed level with final top of wall elevation. If final
grading, paving, landscaping, and/or storm drainage installation adjacent to the wall is not placed
immediately after wall completion, temporary grading and drainage shall be provided to ensure water
runoff is not directed at the wall nor allowed to collect or pond behind the wall until final construction
adjacent to the wall is completed.
SRW Caps
A.
SRW caps shall be properly aligned and glued to underlying units with VERSA-LOK adhesive, a
flexible, high-strength concrete adhesive. Rigid adhesive or mortar are not acceptable.
B.
Caps shall overhang the top course of units by 3/4 to 1 inch. Slight variation in overhang is allowed to
correct alignment at the top of the wall.
4.10
Construction Adjacent to Completed Wall
A.
The Owner or Owner's Representative is responsible for ensuring that construction by others adjacent to
the wall does not disturb the wall or place temporary construction loads on the wall that exceed design
loads, including loads such as water pressure, temporary grades, or equipment loading. Heavy paving
or grading equipment shall be kept a minimum of three feet behind the back of the wall face.
Equipment with wheel loads in excess of 150 psf live load shall not be operated within 10 feet of the
face of the retaining wall during construction adjacent to the wall. Care should be taken by the
General Contractor to ensure water runoff is directed away from the wall structure until final grading
and surface drainage collection systems are completed.
END OF SECTION
04300-7
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Shop fabricated ferrous metal items, galvanized and prime painted.
B.
Refer to Schedule at end of this Section.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish.
1.03
WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A.
Furnish metal fabrications to be cast in concrete to Section 03001 - Concrete.
B.
Section 09900 - Painting: Paint finish.
1.04 REFERENCES
B.
ASTM A53 - Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
A.
ASTM A36 - Structural Steel.
C.
ASTM A307 - Low-Carbon Steel Externally and Internally Threaded Fasteners.
D.
ASTM A386 - Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
E.
ASTM A500 - Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes.
F.
ASTM A501 - Hot-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
G.
AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
H.
FS TT-P-31 - Paint, Oil: Iron Oxide, Ready Mix, Red and Brown.
I.
FS TT-P-641 - Primer Coating, Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide (for Galvanized Surfaces.)
J.
FS TT-P-645 - Primer, Paint, Zinc Chromate, Alkyd Type.
1.05
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage,
size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details
where applicable.
C.
Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.
C.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers; ASTM A307.
D.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.
E.
Primer: FS TT-P-31, brown; for shop application and field touch-up.
F.
Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: FS TT-P-641 and TT-P-645.
05500-1
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
D.
Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to
small uniform radius.
E.
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;
consistent with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise.
F.
Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline.
G.
Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and
related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
2.03 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A.
Squareness: 1/8-inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.
B.
Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.
C.
Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.
D.
Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.
E.
Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.
2.04 FINISH
A.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
B.
Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is
required.
C.
Prime paint items scheduled with two coats.
D.
Galvanize items to minimum 2.0 oz/sq ft zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A386.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Obtain Architect/Engineer approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not
scheduled.
B.
Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is scheduled.
C.
Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment.
D.
Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting
templates, to appropriate Sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
C.
After installation, touch-up scratched or damaged surfaces with primer.
3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.
B.
Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch.
C.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
05500-2
3.04 SCHEDULE
A.
Provide and install items listed in Schedule and shown on Drawings with anchorage and
attachments necessary for installation.
B.
The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not
specifically scheduled.
C.
Steel columns, beams and structurals steel items, prime paint finish.
E.
Ledge and shelf angles, and channels and plates not attached to structural framing, for
support of joists, masonry, etc.; prime paint or galvanized finish.
F.
Lintels; prime paint or galvanized finish where exposed to weather.
G.
Fabricated access doors and frames; prime paint finish.
H.
Channel doorframes and wall openings; prime paint finish.
END OF SECTION
05500-3
SECTION 06114
WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Roof curbs.
B.
Blocking in wall and roof openings.
C.
Wood furring and grounds.
D.
Concealed wood blocking for support of washroom accessories, wall cabinets, and other
miscellaneous accessories.
E.
Wood treatment.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.
B.
Section 10800 - Bath Accessories.
C.
Section 10916 - Closet Specialties: Closet shelving and rods.
D.
Section 12390 - Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinetwork.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ALSC - American Lumber Standards Committee: Softwood Lumber Standard.
B.
APA - American Plywood Association: Grades and Standards.
C.
FS TT-W-571 - Wood Preservation: Treating Practices.
D.
NFPA - National Forest Products Association.
E.
SFPA - Southern Forest Products Association.
F.
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: Standard Grading Rules for West Coast
Lumber.
G.
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
A.
Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.
B.
Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Lumber Grading Rules: WWPA.
B.
Softwood Lumber: Southern Pine species, No. 2 grade, kiln dried or surfaced dry with 19
percent maximum moisture content.
C.
Plywood: APA Grade C-D, with waterproof glue, unsanded.
D.
Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and treated wood
locations; plain finish elsewhere; size and type to suit condition.
E.
Anchors: Adhesive expanding bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. Bolts or ballistic
fasteners for anchorages to steel.
2.02 WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): FS TT-W-571 AWPA Treatment C2 using water
06114-1
borne preservative with 0.30 percent retainage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Erect wood framing members level and plumb.
B.
Space framing and furring 16 inches.
END OF SECTION
06114-2
SECTION 07190
VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Sheet and sealant materials to continue vapor from wall to floor deck construction above.
B.
Sheet and sealant materials to continue vapor from wall to window and door frames.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation: Vapor as an integral part of Batt and Blanket
insulation.
B.
Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames: Door frames.
C.
Section 08400 – Entrances & Storefronts
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
FS L-P-375 - Plastic Film, Flexible, Vinyl Chloride.
B.
FS SS-S-200 - Sealing Compounds, Two-Component, Elastomeric, Polymer Type, Cold
Applied.
C.
FS TT-S-230 - Sealing Compound, Synthetic Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically
Curing for Calking, Sealing and Glazing.
D.
FS TT-S-1647 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, Solvent
Release Type.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Materials of this Section shall provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier
in conjunction with materials in Section 07213.
B.
Sheet and sealing materials to seal gaps between building enclosure components.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Sheet Barrier: FS L-P-375, translucent polyethylene film, Type 1, Class 1; 4 mil thick.
2.02 SEALANTS
A.
Sealant: FS TT-S-230 SS-S-200, Type M; polyurethane base; single component; chemical
curing; non-sagging; Shore 'A' hardness of minimum 15 and maximum 30; white or clear
color.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Tape: Polyethylene self- adhering type; transparent; mesh reinforced; 2 inch (50 mm) wide.
07190-1
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Verify substrate materials are dry and clean, ready to receive work of this Section. Remove
loose or foreign matter, which might impair adhesion.
B.
Coordinate work with progress of work of other affected Sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Secure sheet barrier to wall framing and tape joints and over fasteners.
END OF SECTION
07190-2
SECTION 07213
BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall.
B.
Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and crevices in exterior
wall.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 07190 - Vapor Retarders: Continuing vapor retarder materials to adjacent
construction.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
FS HH-I-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures).
B.
FS HH-I-1252 - Insulation Thermal, Reflective (Aluminum Foil).
A.
Materials of this Section shall provide a thermal and vapor barrier at building enclosure
elements in conjunction with vapor materials in Section 07190.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Owens-Corning
B.
Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Batt Insulation: Preformed glass fiber batt; friction fit type without membrane & Type with
non-reflective membrane on one side.
B.
Vapor Barrier: FS L-P-375, translucent polyethylene film, Type 1, Class 1; 4 mil thick.
C.
Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated; type and size to suit application.
D.
Tape: Polyethylene adhering type; transparent; mesh reinforced; 2 inch (50 mm) wide.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation.
B.
Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed, tested, and
inspected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install batt insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
07213-1
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Install batt insulation, vapor retarder in exterior walls without gaps or voids.
Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage.
Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services
within the plane of insulation. Leave no gaps or voids.
Install insulation and ventilation baffle in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Place insulation tight in joist spaces.
Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap
ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members. Staple or nail in place at
maximum 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. Tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges. Tape seal
tears or cuts in membrane.
Place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. tape
seal in place. Where necessary retain in place with wire mesh secured to framing members.
Tape seal tears or cuts in barrier.
Extend vapor retarder tight to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other
items interrupting the plane of membrane. Tape seal in place. Coordinate vapor seal with
Section 07190.
END OF SECTION0
07213-2
SECTION 07270
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fireproof firestopping and firesafing materials and accessories.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06114 - Blocking & Curbing: Building substrate components.
B.
Section 07190 - Vapor Retarders: Vapor retarder materials to adjacent insulation.
C.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.
D.
Division 15000: Mechanical work requiring firestopping.
E.
Division 16000: Electrical work requiring firestopping.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B.
ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
C.
ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.
D.
FM (Factory Mutual) - Fire Hazard Classifications.
E.
UL - Fire Hazard Classifications.
F.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
G.
UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
H.
UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops.
I.
WH (Warnock Hersey) - Certification Listings.
1.4
DEFINITION
A.
Firestopping (Firesafing): A sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces
between building materials to arrest the movement of smoke, heat, gases, or fire through
wall or floor openings.
1.5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Firestopping Materials: ASTM E119, ASTM E814, UL 263, UL 1479 to achieve a fire
rating as noted on Drawings.
B.
Surface Burning: ASTM E84 & UL 723 with a flame spread / smoke developed rating of
0/25.
C.
Firestop all interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials, and components.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance and limitation criteria.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.
D.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section
with minimum three years experience.
07270-1
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3
years experience.
1.8
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics.
1.9
MOCKUP
A.
Provide mockups of applied firestopping assemblies under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Apply 1 linear ft to a representative substrate surface.
C.
Apply firestop material to a representative penetrated masonry, concrete, stud wall, and
gypsum board surface.
D.
If accepted, mockup will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work.
E.
Mockup may remain as part of the Work.
1.10
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not apply materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60
degrees F.
B.
Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of
materials.
C.
Provide ventilation in areas to receive solvent cured materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
SILICONE ELASTOMERIC COMPOUND
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
GE Silicones, Product: Pensil 100.
2.
Tremco, Product : Fyre - Sil & Fyre - Shield
3.
Hilti, Product: CS 240
4.
2.2
FOAM COMPOUND
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Hilti, Product: CP 620 Fire Foam
3.
Specified Technologies, Product: Pen 200
4.
2.3
FORMULATED COMPOUND OF INCOMBUSTIBLE FIBERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Grace, Product: A/D Firebarrier Mineral Wool.
2.
USG, Product: Thermafiber Safing Insulation.
3.
Tremco, Product: Cerablanket FS.
4.
2.4
JOINT SEALERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Tremco, Product: Dymeric, Dymeric Plus, & Dymonic.
07270-2
3.
4.
USG, Product: Firecode Arcylic Firestop Sealant
2.6
INTUMESCENT PUTTY
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Hevi-Duty Nelson, Product: Nelson FSP.
3.
Flame-Safe, Product: FSP 1000.
4.
2.8
ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces.
B.
Dam Material: Permanent:
1.
Mineral fiberboard.
2.
Mineral fiber matting.
3.
Sheet metal.
4.
Plywood
5.
Alumina silicate fireboard.
C.
Installation Accessories: Clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other
devices required to position and retain materials in place.
2.9
FINISHES
A.
Color: To match adjacent surfaces where exposed.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter, which may
affect bond of firestopping material.
B.
Remove incompatible materials, which may affect bond.
C.
Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
Install material at walls or partition openings, which contain penetrating sleeves, piping,
ductwork, conduit and other items, requiring firestopping.
B.
Apply primer and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Apply firestopping material in sufficient thickness to achieve rating and to uniform density
and texture.
D.
Compress fibered material to achieve a density of 40 percent of its uncompressed density.
E.
Place foamed material in layers to ensure homogenous density, filling cavities and spaces.
Place sealant to completely seal junctions with adjacent dissimilar materials.
F.
Place intumescent coating in sufficient coats to achieve rating required.
G.
Remove dam material after firestopping material has cured
07270-3
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean Work under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.5
PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
07270-4
SECTION 07620
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Coping, parapet, flashings.
B.
Fascias.
C.
Counterflashings over base flashings.
D.
Counterflashings at roof mounted equipment and vent stacks.
1.04
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking [and battens] for metal
roofing substrate profiles.
B.
Section 07311 – Asphalt Shingles.
C.
Section 07631 - Gutters and Downspouts.
D.
E.
Section 09900 - Painting: Prime and finish painting.
1.05
REFERENCES
A.
AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) - Stainless Steel - Uses in Architecture.
B.
ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate.
C.
ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
D.
ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
E.
ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Alloy Sheet and Plate.
F.
ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.
G.
ASTM B486 - Paste Solder.
H.
ASTM D226 - Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.
I.
ASTM D4586 - Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
J.
CDA (Copper Development Association) - Contemporary Copper, A Handbook of Sheet
Copper Fundamentals, Design, Details and Specifications.
K.
CDA - Copper Roofing - A Practical Handbook.
L.
FS O-F-506 - Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid.
M.
NRCA (National Roofing Contractors Association) - Roofing Manual.
N.
SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.06
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening
methods, flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical standing seam, seam,
external corner, internal corner, junction to vertical dissimilar surface, material and finish.
D.
Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
1.07
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA standard details and requirements.
B.
Maintain one copy of each document on site.
07620-1
1.08
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Fabricator and Installer: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years
documented experience.
1.09
PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A.
Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section, under provisions of Section
01039.
1.10
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Stack preformed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to
provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C.
Prevent contact with materials, which may cause discoloration or staining.
1.11
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Coordinate with the work of Section 04300 for installing flashing reglets.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Copper: ASTM B370, cold rolled 20 oz/sq ft thick; natural finish.
B.
Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, .032 inch thick; mill finish, shop pre-coated with baked on
enamel coating of color to be selected.
C.
Pre-Coated Galvanized Steel: ASTM A446, Grade A, G90 zinc coating; 24 gage core steel,
shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating of color to be selected.
2.02
ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Same material and finish as flashing metal, with soft neoprene washers.
B.
Underlayment: ASTM D226 No. 15 asphalt saturated roofing felt.
C.
Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
D.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
E.
Protective Backing Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd.
F.
Sealant: Specified in Section 07900.
G.
Bedding Compound: Rubber-asphalt.
H.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I.
I.
Reglets: Surface mounted and Recessed type, galvanized steel.
J.
Insulating tape: 1/8 inch thick bituminous self adhesive for use between dissimilar metals.
2.04
FABRICATION
A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B.
Fabricate cleats of type sheet metal, same material as sheet, minimum 2 inches wide,
interlockable with sheet.
C.
Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
D.
Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2-inch miter and seam corners.
E.
Form material with standing seams.
F.
Pre-tin edges of copper sheet. Solder shop formed metal joints. After soldering, remove
flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Weather seal joints.
07620-2
G.
H.
I.
2.05
PART 3
Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal
with sealant.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to
form drip.
Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges.
FINISH
A.
Prepare copper surfaces in accordance with Section 09900.
B.
Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil.
EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set,
reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
B.
Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.02
PREPARATION
A.
Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B.
Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant.
3.03
INSTALLATION
A.
Conform to drawing details on the drawings included in the SMACNA manual.
B.
Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit. Secure in place with wedges. Pack remaining
spaces with lead wool. Seal flashings into reglets with sealant.
C.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
D.
Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
E.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and
lines accurate to profiles.
F.
Seal metal joints watertight.
G.
Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with
neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
H.
Provide insulating tape where necessary to prevent contact of dissimilar metals.
3.04
A.
Field inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.
B.
Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with
specified requirements.
3.05
SCHEDULE
A.
Flashing in contact with masonry: Copper, lead coated copper or pre-coated galvanized
steel.
END OF SECTION
07620-3
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Preparing sealant substrate surfaces.
B.
Sealant and backing.
A.
Section 03001 - Concrete: Sealants used in conjunction with concrete.
B.
Section 04500 - Masonry Restoration: Sealants used in conjunction with masonry.
C.
Section 07311 – Asphalt Shingles: Sealants used in conjunction with roofing.
D.
Section 07620 - Flashing & Sheet Metal: Sealants used in conjunction with metal flashings.
E.
Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors & Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with
doorframes.
F.
Section 08610 - Wood Windows: Sealants used in conjunction with wood windows.
G.
Section 08631 – Tubular Plastic Windows: Sealants used in conjunction with vinyl
windows.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber.
B.
ANSI/ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and
Copolymers (Open-Cell Foam).
C.
ASTM C790 - Use of Latex Sealing Compounds.
D.
ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent-Release Type Sealants.
E.
ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds.
F.
FS TT-C-00598 - Calking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type.
G.
FS TT-S-001657 - Sealing Compound, Single Component, Butyl Rubber Based, solvent
Release Type.
H.
FS TT-S-00227 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component.
I.
FS TT-S-00230 - Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component.
J.
FS TT-S-001543 - Sealing Compound, Silicone Rubber Base.
K.
SWI (Sealing and Waterproofers Institute) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specification.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria,
limitations and color availability.
C.
Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300.
D.
Submit two samples 1/4 x 4 inches in size illustrating colors selected.
E.
F.
Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that products meet or
exceed specified requirements.
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section
with minimum three years documented experience.
07900-1
B.
C.
Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum three
years documented experience, approved by sealant manufacturer.
Conform to Sealant and Waterproofers Institute requirements for materials and installation.
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces.
B.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and
after installation.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B.
Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
Provide three-year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air
tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALANTS
A.
Acrylic Emulsion Latex: ASTM C834-76, single component; as selected.
B.
Butyl Sealant: FS TT-S-001657, black color.
C.
Polysulphide Sealant: FS TT-S-230C, Type II - non-sag, Class A; as selected.
D.
Polyurethane Sealant: FS TT-S-230C, Type I - self-leveling, Class A; as selected.
E.
Silicone Sealant: FS TT-S-01543B, Class A, low modulus type; as selected.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056 and D1565; Denverfoam or Greenrod oversized 30 to
50 percent larger than joint width; as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on
Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer.
B.
Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Remove loose materials and foreign matter, which might impair adhesion of sealant.
C.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
D.
Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release and C790 for latex
07900-2
E.
base sealants.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
C.
Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width.
D.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
F.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G.
Tool joints channel shaped.
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING
A.
Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
C.
Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A.
Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 01500.
B.
Protect sealants until cured.
3.06 SCHEDULE
Location
A.
Concrete Sidewalks
B.
Brick
C.
Concrete Block
D.
Dampproofing
E.
Vapor retarder
F.
Roofing
G.
Flashing & sheet metal
H.
Steel doors & frames
I.
Entrances & Storefronts
J.
Bathroom fixtures
Type
D.
E.
E.
C.
A.
B.
B.
E.
E.
A.
END OF SECTION
07900-3
Color
Limestone
Brick red
Gray
Black
White
Black
Clear
Bronze
Gray
White
SECTION 08111
STANDARD STEEL DOORS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Non-rated and fire rated thermally insulated steel doors.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 08112 - Standard Steel Frames.
B.
Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
C.
Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass for doors.
D.
Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable
by Physically Handicapped People.
B.
ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C.
ASTM A525M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process [Metric].
D.
ASTM C236 - Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies
by Means of a Guarded Hot-Box.
E.
ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
F.
ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class.
G.
DHI (Door Hardware Institute) - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel
Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
H.
NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
I.
NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
J.
SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
K.
UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.4
A.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door configurations, location of cut-outs for hardware reinforcement.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and
finishes.
1.5
A.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1.
B.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section
08111-1
1.7
A.
Fire Rated Door Construction: Conform to ASTM E152, NFPA 252, and UL 10B.
B.
Fire Rated Door Construction: Rate of rise of 450 F degrees across door thickness.
C.
Installed Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.
B.
Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
C.
Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings.
B.
Coordinate frame installation with size, location, and installation of service utilities.
C.
Coordinate the work with door opening construction, doorframe, and door hardware
installation.
D.
Sequence installation to ensure wire connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR MANUFACTURERS
A.
Amweld Building Products.
B.
General Products Co. (Benchmark).
C.
Republic Builders Products.
D.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:
Permitted.
2.2
DOORS
Grade I - Standard-duty 1-3/4 inches (Level C).
Model 1 - Full Flush Design
Model 2 - Seamless Design
Grade II - Heavy-duty 1-3/4 inches (Level B).
Model 1 - Full Flush Design
Model 2 - Seamless Design
A.
Exterior Doors (Thermally Isolated, non-rated): SDI-100 Grade II Model 1.
B.
Exterior Doors (Thermally Isolated, fire rated): SDI-100 Grade II Model 1.
C.
Interior Doors (Fire Rated): SDI-100 Grade I Model 1.
2.3
DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Face: Steel sheet in accordance with SDI-100.
Exterior Doors = 16 gauge.
Interior Doors = 18 gauge.
B.
End Closure: Channel, 0.047 inches thick, flush.
C.
Core: polystyrene foam with vertical steel stiffeners.
D.
Thermal Insulated Door: Total insulation R-value of 8, measured in accordance with ASTM
C236.
08111-2
2.5
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place.
B.
Attach fire rated label to each fire rated door unit.
2.6
FINISH
A.
Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60 (ASTM A525M Z180).
B.
Primer: Baked.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before
starting work.
B.
Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with SDI-100 and DHI.
B.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08112 and
hardware specified in Section 08710.
C.
Touch-up factory finished doors.
3.3
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work.
B.
Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
3.5
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule.
END OF SECTION
08111-3
SECTION 08112
STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Non-rated & fire rated steel frames.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors.
B.
Section 08712 - Door Hardware: Hardware, silencers, and weatherstripping.
C.
Section 09900 - Painting: Painting.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
B.
ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
C.
ASTM A525M - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process [Metric].
D.
ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
E.
DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel
Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.
F.
NFPA 252 - Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
G.
SDI-100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
H.
UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.4
A.
B.
Product Data: Indicate frame configuration and finishes.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate frame elevations, reinforcement, anchor types and spacings,
location of cutouts for hardware, and finish.
1.5
A.
B.
C.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of SDI-100 and ANSI A117.1.
B.
1.7
A.
Fire Rated Frame Construction: Conform to ASTM E152, NFPA 252 & UL 10B.
B.
Installed Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class same as fire door.
1.8
A.
08112-1
B.
1.9
PART 2
Accept frames on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Coordinate the work with frame opening construction, door, and hardware installation.
C.
Sequence installation to ensure wire connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
PRODUCTS
2.1
FRAME MANUFACTURERS
A.
Amweld Building Products.
B.
General Products Co. (Benchmark).
C.
Republic Builders Products.
D.
Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Product options and substitutions.
Substitutions: Permitted.
2.2
FRAMES
A.
Frames: To suit SDI-100 Grade and Model of door specified in Section 08111.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion.
B.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
C.
Silencers: Resilient rubber fitted into drilled hole.
D.
Weatherstripping: Resilient rubber set in steel frame.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate frames for knock down field assembly or for gypsum board slip on type.
B.
Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place.
C.
Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single silencers for single doors on strike side.
D.
Attach fire rated label to each fire rated door unit.
E.
Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4-inch head member where necessary.
2.5
FINISH
A.
Steel Sheet: Galvanized to ASTM A525 G60 (ASTM A525M Z180).
B.
Primer: Air-dried. Baked.
C.
Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
starting work.
B.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install frames in accordance with SDI-100 and DHI.
B.
Coordinate with masonry and gypsum board wall construction for anchor placement.
08112-2
C.
D.
E.
Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
Coordinate installation of frames with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710
and doors in Section 08111.
Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to
structure and floor.
3.3
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edges, crossed corner to
corner.
3.4
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule in drawings.
END OF SECTION
08112-3
SECTION 08211
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.1
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Flush wood doors; flush configuration; non-rated.
1.2
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 08710 - Door Hardware.
B.
Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing of doors.
1.3
REFERENCES
A.
AWI - Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute.
B.
HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood.
1.4
A.
B.
Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and
characteristics.
C.
Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts
required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 8 x 8 inch in size illustrating wood grain,
stain color, and sheen.
1.5
A.
B.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1300, Premium Grade.
B.
Finish doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 1500.
C.
1.7
A.
B.
Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with AWI Section 1300.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
B.
Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware
installation.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B.
Provide warranty to the following term:
08211-1
C.
PART 2
1.
Interior Doors: Five (5) years.
Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation
tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
B.
Fenestra Corp.
C.
Graham Manufacturing Corp.
D.
Southwood Door Co.
E.
Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions:
Permitted.
2.2
DOOR TYPES
A.
Flush Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick; solid core construction.
2.3
DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A.
Core (Solid, Non-Rated): AWI Section 1300, Type PC - Particleboard.
2.4
FLUSH DOOR FACING
A.
Veneer Facing (Flush Interior Doors): AWI Premium quality Birch wood, plain sliced with
book matched grain, for transparent finish.
2.5
ADHESIVE
A.
Facing Adhesive: Type I - waterproof.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standards requirements.
B.
Provide lock blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware reinforcement.
C.
Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Hardwood for transparent finish.
D.
Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
E.
Bond edge banding to cores.
F.
Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and
dimensions. Do not machine for surface hardware. Provide solid blocking for through
bolted hardware.
G.
Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.
H.
Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI 1600.
PART 3
3.1
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
starting work.
B.
C.
Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
alignment.
08211-2
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install non-rated doors in accordance with AWI Quality Standard, NFPA 80 requirements.
C.
Trim non-rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges.
D.
Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch.
E.
Machine cut for hardware.
F.
Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08112 &
08113 and hardware specified in Section 08710.
G.
Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
H.
Install door louvers plumb and level.
3.3
INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A.
Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances.
B.
Conform to AWI Section 1300 requirements for maximum diagonal distortion.
C.
Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,
corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.
D.
Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string,
top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.
E.
Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge
to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inches surface area.
3.4
ADJUSTING
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work.
B.
Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.
C.
Adjust closer for full closure.
3.5
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Door and Frame Schedule in drawings.
END OF SECTION
08211-3
SECTION 08411
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
1.19
SUMMARY
A.
Exterior storefront framing.
B.
Storefront framing for punched openings.
C.
Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.
1.20
A.
Delegated Design: Contractor to design aluminum-framed systems.
B.
Deflection of Framing Members:
1.
2.
1.21
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to L/175.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality-control program for structural-sealant-glazed system.
B.
Preconstruction sealant testing.
C.
Mockups for each form of construction and finish.
1.22
WARRANTY
A.
Materials and Workmanship: Two years.
B.
Finish: Five years.
1.23
MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A.
Entrance Door Hardware: Six months.
B.
Structural-Sealant-Glazed Systems: Six months.
1.24
A.
MATERIALS
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer.
08411-1
B.
1.25
A.
Steel reinforcement.
MANUFACTURERS
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Address:
2.
B.
1.26
A.
Kawneer Company, Inc.
555 Guthridge Court,
Technology Park/Atlanta,
Norcross, GA 30092
Telephone:
770 449 5555
Fax:
770 734 1560
Proprietary Product(s)/System(s): Kawneer Aluminum Entrances.
a.
Series: Insulclad® 260, 360 or 560 Swing Doors
b.
Finish/Color: (See 1.11 Finishes)
Approved equal; refer to Section 01600.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members.
1.
2.
3.
Construction: Thermally broken.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: As indicated.
B.
Brackets and reinforcements.
C.
Fasteners and accessories.
D.
Concrete and masonry inserts.
E.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing.
F.
Framing system gaskets and sealants.
1.27
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
B.
Glazing gaskets.
C.
Spacers and setting blocks.
D.
Bond-breaker tape.
E.
Glazing Sealants:
08411-2
1.
2.
1.28
A.
1.29
A.
1.30
Structural sealant.
Weatherseal sealant.
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
Entrance Doors:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness.
Door Design: As indicated.
Glazing stops and gaskets.
Entrance Door Hardware: Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." As scheduled.
ALUMINUM FINISHES
Aluminum Finishes: Class I, clear anodic;Class I, color anodic;Baked enamel or powder coat.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner engaged.
B.
Structural-Sealant-Glazed Systems:
recommendations.
1.31
A.
Tested and inspected according to ASTM C 1401
Testing: By Owner-engaged agency.
END OF SECTION
08411-3
SECTION 08712
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Hardware for wood and hollow steel doors.
B.
Thresholds.
C.
Gasketting.
1.03 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A.
Furnish templates to Section 06200 for door and frame preparation.
B.
Furnish cylinders to Section 08111 and 08112 for installation.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 08111 - Standard Steel Doors.
B.
C.
Section 08211 – Flush Wood Doors
D.
Section 16000 - Electrical: Power supply to electric door strikes.
1.05 REFERENCES
A.
B.
ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
C.
AWI - Architectural Woodwork Institute.
D.
BHMA - Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association.
E.
DHI - Door and Hardware Institute.
F.
NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers.
G.
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
H.
SDI - Steel Door Institute.
1.06 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer
of any internal reinforcement for door hardware.
A.
Manufacturers: Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum
three years experience.
B.
Hardware Supplier: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with
three years experience.
C.
Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to
assist in the work of this Section.
A.
Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
B.
Conform to the applicable sections of Chapter 5 of NFPA 101.
08712-1
1.09 CERTIFICATIONS
A.
Architectural Hardware Consultant shall inspect complete installation and certify that
hardware and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as specified herein.
B.
Provide one copy of certifications to Architect/Engineer.
1.10 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware.
C.
Provide product data on specified hardware.
D.
E.
Submit manufacturer's certificate under provisions of Section 01400 that fire rated hardware
meets or exceeds specified requirements.
A.
Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures
related to preventative maintenance.
1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600.
C.
Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to
match hardware schedule.
D.
Deliver keys to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.
E.
Protect hardware from theft by cataloging and storing in secure area.
1.13 WARRANTY
A.
Provide five-year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage of door closers.
1.15 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware
component.
B.
Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A.
Hinges: Stanley, McKinney
B.
Latch Sets: Corbin, Russwin, Schlage, Sargent.
C.
Cylinder Locks: Corbin, Russwin, Sargent, Schlage.
D.
Mortise Locks: Corbin, Russwin, Sargent, Schlage.
E.
Closers: Russwin, Corbin, LCN, Russwin, Sargent.
F.
Manual Bolts: Corbin, Russwin, Sargent, Schlage.
G.
Gasketting: National Guard Products, Inc., Pemko.
H.
08712-2
2.03 KEYING
A.
Door Locks: Keyed differently with Master keyed including construction keying.
B.
Supply four keys for each lock.
C.
Supply keys in the following quantities:
1.
Two master keys.
2.
Three construction keys.
2.05 FINISHES
A.
All Hardware to be polished brass finish; US3, BHMA 632.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by
the manufacturer.
B.
Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices.
C.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of BHMA.
B.
Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Conform to ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for the handicapped.
3.03 SCHEDULE
Hardware finishes to be selected by Owner.
Hardware Types
L-0
Extra Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locksets lockset/latchset with ADA-compliant lever.
L-1
Heavy Duty Bored lockset/latchset with ADA-compliant lever.
Hinges
H-1
1-1/2 pair of Stanley full mortise standard weight ball bearing, 4" x 4".
H-2
1-1/2 pair Stanley full mortise standard weight hinges, 4" x 4".
Closer
C-1
LCN 4000 Series parallel arm mounted full rack & pinion hydraulic door closer.
Door Bumpers
DB-1 Ives floor mounted door stop #FS438.
Panic Hardware
Corbin Russwin Narrow stile crossbar exist device ED7200 Rim exit device.
Deadbolt #1
Corbin Russwin Tubular Deadbolt DL 2013 single cylinder.
END OF SECTION
08712-3
SECTION 08800
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Glass for Mirrors.
B.
Glass for Aluminum Storefront.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances & Storefronts: Glass.
B.
Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Mirrors.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing
Material Used in Buildings.
B.
ASTM C669 - Glazing Compounds for Back Bedding and Face Glazing of Metal Sash.
C.
ASTM C804 - Use of Solvent Release Type Sealants.
D.
ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers.
E.
ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
F.
ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass.
G.
ASTM C1048 - Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.
H.
ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architectural Safety Glass.
I.
ASTM E84- - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
J.
ASTM E283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain
Walls and Doors.
K.
ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
L.
ASTM E546 - Test Method for Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
M.
ASTM E576 - Test Method for Dew/Frost Point of Sealed Insulating Glass Units in Vertical
Position.
N.
ASTM E773 - Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
O.
ASTM E774 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
P.
FGMA - Glazing Manual.
Q.
FGMA - Sealant Manual.
R.
Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual.
S.
SIGMA - Sealed Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association.
1.4
A.
Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure, vapor retarder, and
air barrier:
1.
In conjunction with materials described in Section 07900.
2.
To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air
barrier and vapor retarder seal.
3.
To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed
assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.
B.
Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to
plane of glass as measured in accordance with ASTM E330 & ASTM E283.
08800-1
C.
Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing
materials, whichever is less.
A.
Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual for glazing
installation methods.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Submit 12 x 12 inch samples of insulated glass units.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A.
B.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE GLASS MANUFACTURERS
A.
AFGD Glass
B.
Pittsburg Plate Glass.
C.
LOF.
D.
2.02 GLASS MATERIALS
A.
Float or Plate Glass: Clear, premium quality windows, 1/4 inch thick minimum at store
fronts.
B.
Tempered Glass: 1/4 inch thick minimum in interior doors and where required by drawings.
B.
Insulated Tempered Glass Units at Exterior Openings: Double pane units with aluminum
edge seal; both panes of tempered clear glass with Low 'E' 2; interpane space purged with
dry hermetic air; total thickness of 5/8 inch.
C.
Mirror Glass (Type MR-A): Clear float type with copper & silver coating, organic
overcoating, beveled edges, ¼” thick, sizes as shown on the plans.
2.05 ACCEPTABLE GLAZING COMPOUND MANUFACTURERS
A.
Dow Chemical.
B.
2.06
GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
Silicone Sealant: Single component, capable of water immersion without loss of properties;
non-bleeding; non-staining; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25; dark brown color.
B.
Verify glazing sealant is compatible with glazing accessories as supplied by door and
window manufacturer. Notify Architect if non-silicone compatible accessories are supplied
and require a field applied glazing sealant.
2.07
GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Supply glazing accessories in accordance with window and door manufacturer's standard
shop glazing procedures and as shown on the drawings.
08800-2
B.
Supply field installed glazing accessories in accordance with window and door
manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.
Verify wall surfaces are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section.
B.
Verify sashes are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section.
C.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
B.
Seal porous glazing channels or recesses.
3.03 MOUNTING/INSTALLATION OF MIRRORS
A.
Apply 'wallboard' adhesive to back of mirror to ensure minimum coverage of 60%.
B.
Set mirror to wall surface in locations shown on the drawings.
C.
Apply pressure to mirror to ensure proper adhesion to wall surface.
3.04 EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (PREFORMED GLAZING)
A.
Cut glazing tape or spline to length; install on glass pane. Seal corners by butting tape and
dabbing with butyl sealant.
B.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points.
C.
Rest glass on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full
contact at perimeter of pane.
D.
Install removable stops without displacement of glazing spline. Exert pressure for full
continuous contact.
E.
Trim protruding tape edge.
3.05 EXTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
A.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch (5 mm) below
sightline. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant.
B.
Apply heel bed of butyl sealant along exterior void ensuring full contact with pane.
C.
D.
Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient
pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane.
E.
Install removable stops, spacer strips inserted between glass, and applied stops at 24 inch
(600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sightline. Place glazing tape on glass with tape
1/4 inch (6 mm) below sightline.
F.
Fill gap between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on pane,
but not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm) below sightline.
G.
Apply cap bead of sealant along exterior void, to uniform line, flush with sightline. Tool or
wipe sealant surface with solvent for smooth appearance.
3.05 EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)
A.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glass pane.
B.
Install removable stops with pane centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at
24 inch (600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sightline.
08800-3
C.
D.
Fill gap between pane and stops with type sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on pane,
but not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm) below sightline.
Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sightline. Tool or wipe sealant surface with solvent
for smooth appearance.
3.06 INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)
A.
Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)
above sightline.
B.
C.
Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane.
D.
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of pane in same manner described above.
E.
Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full
continuous contact.
F.
Knife trim protruding tape.
3.07 INTERIOR COMBINATION METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)
A.
Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6
mm) above sightline.
B.
C.
Rest glass on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane.
D.
Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glass, and applied stops at 24 inch
(600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sightline.
E.
Fill gap between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on pane
to uniform and level line.
F.
Trim protruding tape edge.
3.08 INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND)
A.
Install glass resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer
shims at 24 inch (600 mm) centers, kept 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sightline.
B.
Locate and secure glass pane using glaziers' clips.
C.
Fill gaps between pane and stops with glazing compound until flush with sightline. Tool
surface to straight line.
3.09 CLEANING
A.
After installation, mark pane with an "X" by using plastic tape or removable paste.
B.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
C.
Remove labels after work is completed.
3.10
SCHEDULE
A.
Insulated glass at Aluminum Storefront - tinted glass '15% Grey'.
END OF SECTION
08800-4
SECTION 09260
GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Metal channel ceiling framing.
B.
Acoustic insulation.
C.
Gypsum board.
D.
Taped and sanded joint treatment.
E.
Fasteners and accessories.
1.02 WORK INSTALLED BUT FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A.
Section 10800 - Toilet and Bath Accessories: Frames for recessed washroom accessories.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing.
B.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support.
C.
Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation: Thermal insulation.
D.
E.
Section 08305 - Access Doors: Metal access panels.
F.
Section 09900 - Painting Surface finish.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
B.
ASTM C442 - Gypsum Backing Board & Core Board.
C.
ASTM C473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.
D.
ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
E.
ASTM C557 - Adhesive for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing.
F..
ASTM C630 - Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.
G..
ASTM C646 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Sheet Material.
H.
ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum
Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board.
I.
ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
J.
ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.
K.
ASTM C1658 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Panels.
L.
ASTM D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.
M.
ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
N.
ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of
Building Partitions.
O.
ASTM E119 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
P.
FS HH-I-521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures).
Q.
GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings.
R.
GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum
Board.
09260-1
A.
Acoustic Attenuation for Identified Interior Partitions: 45 STC or greater in accordance with
ANSI/ASTM E90.
A.
Perform work in accordance with ASTM C840.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work with three years
A.
Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with Section 06112 as
noted on the drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM
A.
United States Gypsum.
B.
Georgia - Pacific.
C.
Gold Bond Building Products Division.
D.
2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
See Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing.
B.
Furring, Framing & accessories: See drawings, ASTM C 645.
C.
Fasteners: ASTM C646. GA 201 and GA 216.
D.
Adhesive: ASTM C557. GA201 and GA216.
2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A.
Gypsum Board: ASTM C36, ASTM C630, ASTM C1396, ASTM D3273; 5/8 inch (13
mm) thick, paperless, moisture- and mold-resistant type, maximum permissible length; ends
square cut, tapered and beveled square edges.
B.
Fire Rated Gypsum Board: C36, ASTM C630, ASTM C1396, ASTM D3273; fire resistive,
paperless and moisture- and mold-resistant type, Type X, UL rated; 5/8 inch (13 mm) thick,
maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled square edges.
2.06 ACCESSORIES
A.
Acoustical Insulation: FS-HH-I-521; preformed mineral wool, friction fit type without
integral vapor barrier membrane, 3 1/2 inch thick.
B.
Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board;
as manufactured by USG.
C.
Corner Beads: Metal.
D.
Joint Materials: ANSI/ASTM C475; GA 201 and GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint
compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
09260-2
B.
instructed by the manufacturer.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.03 WALL FURRING INSTALLATION
A.
Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block and concrete walls.
B.
Erect furring channels vertically; space maximum 24 inches on center, extend from floor to
ceiling lines. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.
3.07 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
A.
Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and
around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing
through partitions.
B.
Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.08 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A.
Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 201 and GA 216 and manufacturer's
instructions.
B.
Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges
occurring over firm bearing.
C.
Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over
firm bearing.
D.
Use screws when fastening gypsum board to wood furring or framing.
E.
Double Layer Applications: Use gypsum board for first layer, placed perpendicular to
framing or furring members. Use fire rated gypsum board for fire rated partitions. Place
second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first
layer.
F.
Place corner beads at external corners as indicated. Use longest practical length. Place edge
trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials as indicated.
3.09 JOINT TREATMENT
A.
Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
receive finishes. Provide three coat for all joint treatment
B.
Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
C.
Repair existing wall surfaces to match new work.
3.10 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction.
END OF SECTION
09260-3
SECTION 09511
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Suspended metal grid ceiling system, non-rated.
B.
Acoustical tile panels, non-rated.
C.
Non-fire rated assemblies.
D.
Perimeter trim.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A.
HVAC Specs - See Mechanical Drawings: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system.
B.
Electrical Specs - See Electrical Drawings: Light fixtures in ceiling system.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings
B.
ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panels.
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and
ceiling tile panels metal pans with ten years minimum experience.
B.
Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience.
A.
Conform to applicable building code for combustibility requirements for materials.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide product data on metal grid system components, and acoustic units.
B.
C.
Submit two samples full size illustrating material and finish of acoustic units.
D.
Submit two samples each, 24 inches long, of suspension system main runner and cross
runner.
E.
A.
Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C), and humidity of 20
to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation.
1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A.
Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust
generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B.
Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
1.11 EXTRA STOCK
A.
Provide extra quantity of acoustic units under provisions of Section 01700.
09511-1
B.
Provide 5 cartons of extra tile to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Armstrong (Eastern Products), 9/16" Suprafine Exposed Tee Grid.
B.
Celotex, 9/16” Elite Narrow Stab
C.
USG, 9/16” Fineline
D.
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS
A.
Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non-fire rated exposed T components die cut and
interlocking, 24" x 48" size.
B.
Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings, trim channels, hold down clips
and fasteners required for suspended grid system.
C.
Grid Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating.
D.
Grid Finish: White color.
E.
Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly
secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with
maximum deflection of 1/360.
2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNITS
A.
Armstrong, Style: Tegular Lay-in, Designer Second Look II #2754.
B.
Celotex, Style: Non-directional fissured with 24”x24” pattern
C.
USG, 9/16” Non-directional fissured with 24”x24” pattern
D.
2.04 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS
A.
Acoustic Panels: Conforming to the following:
1.
Size: 24 x 48 inches.
2.
Thickness: 3/4 inches.
3.
Composition: Wet Formed Mineral Fiber.
4.
Light Reflectance: 80 percent.
5.
NRC Range: 55.
6.
Fire Hazard Classification: Class A, Flame spread 25 or under.
7.
Surface Color: White.
8.
Surface Finish: Non-directional fissured.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.
Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.
C.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 manufacturer's instructions and as
supplemented in this Section.
09511-2
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 span maximum.
Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with
other work.
Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying
members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.
Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.
Center system on room axis leaving equal border units according to reflected plan.
Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead
load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located
within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently.
Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners.
Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical
lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Field
rabbet panel edge, provide preformed closers to match edge molding.
Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft.
B.
Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees
maximum.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Finish Schedule, sheet A-8.1.
END OF SECTION
09511-3
SECTION 09650
RESILIENT FLOORING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Resilient base & transition strips.
B.
Resilient tile flooring.
C.
Resilient stair treads.
1.02
PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION
A.
Section 06112 - Framing & Sheathing: 3/8 inch plywood underlayment.
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Floor substrate surface.
B.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Wood Base Finish.
C.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall materials to receive base.
D.
Section 09686 - Carpeting: Termination edging of adjacent floor finish.
1.04
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B.
FS L-F-1641 - Floor Covering, Translucent or Transparent Vinyl Surface, with Backing.
C.
FS L-F-475 - Floor Covering, Vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with Backing.
D.
ASTM F 1066 - Vinyl Composition Floor Tile.
E.
FS SS-W-40 - Wall Base: Rubber and Vinyl Plastic.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance
characteristics, sizes, patterns and colors available.
C.
D.
Submit two samples 4 x 4 inches in size, illustrating color and pattern for each floor material
specified.
E.
Submit two four inch long samples of base and stair material for each color specified.
F.
G.
Where installation of resilient flooring is on concrete slab submit concrete slab moisture
content test results under provisions of Section 01300.
1.06
A.
Conform to applicable code for flame/smoke rating requirements of vinyl tile and sheet
goods in accordance with ASTM E84.
1.07
A.
Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.
B.
Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.
09650-1
1.08
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700.
B.
Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested
schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.
1.09
A.
Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve
temperature stability.
B.
Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during,
and 24 hours after installation of materials.
1.10
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
B.
Furnish under provisions of Section 01700.
Provide 200 sq ft of flooring, 100 lineal feet of base, and 50 lineal feet of stair materials of
each material specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.03
MANUFACTURERS - TILE FLOORING
A.
Armstrong, Premium Excelon. Colors to be selected.
B
Congoleum, Alternative. Colors to be selected.
C.
Tarkett, Expressions. Colors to be selected.
2.04
MATERIALS - TILE FLOORING
A.
Vinyl Composition Tile: ASTM F1066:
1.
Size: 12 x 12 inch.
2.
Thickness: 1/8 inch.
3.
Design: Marbleized.
4.
Manufacturer: Armstrong, Premium Excelon.
5.
2.07
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - BASE MATERIALS & TRANSITION STRIPS
A.
Johnsonite Flooring Products Division.
B.
Mercer Products Co.
C.
Roppe.
D.
2.08
BASE MATERIALS
A.
Base: FS SS-W-40, Rubber; 4 inch (100 mm) high; 1/8 inch thick; top set coved premolded
external corners.
2.09
ACCESSORIES
A.
Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer.
B.
Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
C.
Edge Strips: Tapered Rubber. Color - To Be Selected. Maximum one inch exposed edge
with smooth surface.
D.
Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer.
09650-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft (3 mm
in 3 m), and are ready to receive Work.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.
C.
Do not install resilient flooring over concrete slabs, which have a moisture content of 3lbs or
water per 1000 s.f. per 24 hours.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects
with subfloor filler.
B.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface.
C.
Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured.
D.
Vacuum clean substrate.
E.
Apply primer to wood surfaces.
3.04
INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Mix tile from container to ensure shade variations are consistent.
C.
Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.
D.
Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.
E.
Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile
patterns.
F.
Install tile pattern shown on the drawings. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or
area perimeter.
G.
Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar.
H.
Install resilient edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates.
I.
Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce
tight joints.
J.
Install flooring in pan type floor access covers. Maintain floor pattern.
3.05
INSTALLATION - BASE MATERIAL
A.
Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches (45 mm) between
joints.
B.
Miter internal corners. At external corners, 'V' cut back of base strip to 2/3 of its thickness
and fold. At exposed ends use premolded units.
C.
Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces.
D.
Scribe and fit to doorframes and other interruptions.
3.07
PROTECTION
A.
Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation.
3.08
CLEANING
A.
Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
B.
Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
09650-3
3.09
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Finish Schedule, sheet A-8.1.
END OF SECTION
09650-4
SECTION 09681
CARPET TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.2
Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Termination edging of adjacent floor finish.
REFERENCES
A.
B.
C.
D.
1.3
ASTM E648 - Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat
Energy Source.
ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
FS ZZ-C-811 - Cushion (Underlay); Carpet and Rug, Sponge- Rubber.
FS DDD-C-0095 - Carpet and Rugs, Wool, Nylon, Acrylic, Modacrylic, Polyester,
Polypropylene.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet.
C.
Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes,
patterns, colors available, and method of installation.
D.
E.
Submit samples 4 x 4 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet and cushion material
specified.
F.
Submit two 4 inch long samples of edge strip, base gripper, material for each color specified.
G.
1.4
A.
B.
Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for
cleaning.
09686-1
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups for each type of carpet tile installation.
B.
Products comply with requirements of CRI's Green Label Indoor Air Quality Testing Program.
C.
Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
1.7
Carpet Tile: Limited lifetime.
A.
Conform to applicable code for carpet flammability requirements in accordance with ASTM E84.
B.
Conform to ANSI/ASTM E648
1.8
A.
Store materials for one day prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1
MANUFACTURER:
A.
2.2
Cambridge Nexterra Carpet Tile by Beaulieu Carpets.
MATERIALS
A.
Carpet Tile Style: “Cordage”; color: “Abaca”.
1.
Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon (25% recycled content)
2.
Pile Characteristic: Textured loop pattern.
3.
Density: 8,920
4.
Pile Thickness: 0.113 inches.
5.
Surface Pile Weight: 28 oz./sq. yd
6.
Size: 24 by 24 inches.
B.
Adhesive: i-Loc Solv-Free Pressure Sensitive Adhesive.
09686-2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation in 1/4 inch in 10
ft (6 mm in 3 m) and are ready to receive work.
B.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
Installation Method:
1.
Install per manufacturer’s instructions.
2.
Glue down with releasable adhesive.
3.
Quarter turn installation pattern.
4.
Cut and fit carpet around interruptions.
5.
Fit carpet tight to vertical interruptions, leaving no gaps.
6.
Form joints straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps
CLEANING
A.
B.
3.5
Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects
with sub-floor filler.
Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface.
Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.
Vacuum floor surfaces.
Remove exccess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.
Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces
CLEANING
A.
Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
09686-3
SECTION 09900
PAINTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Surface preparation & painting.
1.02 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 02513 - Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Pavement markings.
B.
Section 15000 - Mechanical: Prefinished mechanical items.
C.
Section 16000 - Electrical: Prefinished electrical items.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related
Products.
B.
ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A.
Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
A.
Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish
products with three years experience.
B.
Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with three years
A.
Conform to applicable code for flame/fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
C.
Submit Manufacturer's color charts illustrating range of colors and textures available for
each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection.
D.
Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01300.
1.09 FIELD SAMPLES
A.
Provide samples under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Provide two field sample panels, 24 inches long by 24 inches wide, illustrating coating color,
texture, and finish.
C.
Locate where directed.
D.
Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work.
A.
B.
09900-1
C.
D.
E.
F.
Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.
Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code,
coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for
mixing and reducing.
Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a
maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise
by manufacturer's instructions.
Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.
A.
Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient
temperatures above 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours
after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50
percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) for
interiors; 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) for exterior; unless required otherwise by
manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F (18 degrees C)
for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles (860 lx) measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT
A.
Benjamin Moore, Product: Latex Enamel.
B.
Sherwin Williams, Product: Latex Enamel.
C.
Pittsburgh Paint, Product: Latex Enamel.
D.
2.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PRIMER-SEALERS
A.
Benjamin Moore, Product: Latex Enamel.
B.
Sherwin Williams, Product: Latex Enamel.
C.
Pittsburgh, Product: Latex Enamel.
D.
2.08 MATERIALS
A.
Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste
consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating.
B.
Coatings: Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
C.
Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not
specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.
2.09 FINISHES
A.
Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish and color schedule.
09900-2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
B.
Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any
condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C.
Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply
finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:
1.
Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.
2.
Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
3.
Exterior Located Wood: 19 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.
D.
Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces
or finishing.
B.
Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section.
C.
Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.
D.
Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E.
Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or
high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching
primer immediately following cleaning.
F.
Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove foreign
particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer.
G.
Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.
H.
Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply
coat of etching primer.
I.
Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy
coatings of scale are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing
with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and
nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.
J.
Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges
to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel
surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.
K.
Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming.
Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after
primer has dried; sand between coats.
L.
Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.
Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after prime coat has been applied. Sand between coats.
M.
Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
N.
Masonry/Stone to receive paint finishes: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter and loose
paint. Prime entire surface and repaint.
3.03 PROTECTION
A.
Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.
B.
Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.
C.
Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from
09900-3
D.
disfiguring other surfaces.
Remove empty paint containers from site.
3.04 APPLICATION
A.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.
C.
Apply each coat to uniform finish.
D.
Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
E.
Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F.
Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
G.
Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain
before set. Wipe excess from surface.
H.
Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork with primer paint.
3.05 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A.
Paint shop primed equipment items.
B.
Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical
components and paint separately.
C.
Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, hangers, brackets, collars and
supports, except where items are prefinished.
D.
Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.
E.
Paint interior surfaces of convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through
grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed
behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.
F.
Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas.
G.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment
before installing equipment.
H.
Color code equipment, piping, and conduit in accordance with requirements indicated. Color
band and identify with flow arrows, names and numbering.
I.
Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.
B.
During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools,
equipment, surplus materials, and debris.
C.
Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material, which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed
metal containers and remove daily from site.
3.07 SCHEDULE - SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING
A.
Metal Fabrications (Section 05500): Exposed surfaces.
B.
Metal Doors - Section 08111: Standard Steel Doors.
C.
Metal Frames - Section 08112: Standard Steel Frames.
3.08 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
A.
Wood - Painted
1.
One coat latex primer sealer.
2.
Two coats latex enamel, semi-gloss.
B.
Steel/Iron/Metal - Unprimed
1.
One coat zinc chromate primer.
09900-4
C.
D.
2.
Two coats latex enamel, semi- gloss.
Steel/Iron/Metal - Shop Primed
1.
Touch-up with zinc chromate primer.
2.
Steel - Galvanized
1.
2.
3.09 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES
A.
Wood – Transparent finish.
1.
One coat water-based stain.
2.
Two coats catalyzed polyurethane finish.
B.
Steel/Iron/Metal - Unprimed
1.
2.
C.
Steel/Iron/Metal - Primed
1.
Touch-up with original primer.
2.
D.
Steel - Galvanized
1.
2.
E.
Plaster, Gypsum Board
1.
One coat latex primer sealer.
2.
Two coats latex enamel, eggshell.
F.
Concrete/Concrete Block
1.
One coat of masonry primer.
2.
Two coats of masonry latex enamel, semi-gloss.
3.10 SCHEDULE - COLORS
A.
Refer to Finish Schedule on sheet A-8.1.
END OF SECTION
09900-5
SECTION 10210
METAL WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Louvers and frames.
B.
Sealants.
C.
Bird and Insect screening.
A.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealants.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 06112 – Rough Framing: Prepared exterior wall opening.
B.
Section 06200 – Finish Carpentry: adjacent trim
B.
C.
Section 15000 - Mechanical: Ductwork attachment to louver.
1.05 REFERENCES
A.
AMCA 500 - (Air Movement Council Association) Test Method for Louvers, Dampers, and
Shutters.
B.
ANSI/ASTM B221 - Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
C.
ASTM B209 - Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
1.06 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Installed louver to permit passage of air without blade vibration or noise.
B.
Fabricate louver to permit 50 percent free area.
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of AMCA certified louvers with three
years experience.
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Indicate on shop drawings, layout, elevations, dimensions, and tolerances; head, jamb, and
sill details; blade configuration; screening; and frames.
C.
D.
Submit one sample illustrating finish and color of exterior finish.
E.
A.
Submit data under provisions of Section 01700.
1.10 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate work of this Section with installation of masonry veneer.
B.
Coordinate work of this Section with mechanical ductwork.
10210-1
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A.
Airline Products Company.
B.
C/S Lower Forms.
C.
Reliable Metal Products, Inc.
D.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
B.
Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221, alloy, extruded shape, prefinished with Duranodic Bronze
or white finish. (color locations to be determined).
Fasteners and Anchors: Aluminum type.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh, set in aluminum frame.
B.
Primer: Zinc chromate, alkyd type.
C.
Flashings: Of same material as louver frame. Aluminum.
D.
Sealants: B type specified in Section 07900.
2.04 FABRICATION
A.
Louver Size: 4 inches (100 mm) deep, face measurements.
B.
Louver Blade: Sloped at 45 degree; Inverted 'Y' shape; minimum material thickness of 0.125
inch. Integral waterstops on blade, 50% free area.
C.
Louver Frame: Channel shape, mechanically welded corner joints, material thickness of
0.125 inch.
D.
Head, Jamb, and Sill Flashings: Roll formed to required shape, one piece per location.
E.
Screens: Permanently install screen mesh in shaped frame with reinforced corner
construction; screw to interior face of louver frame.
2.05 FINISHES
A.
Exterior Aluminum Surfaces, Screens, Mill finish. Anodized to Brown or white color, as
selected.
B.
Interior Aluminum Surfaces and Screens, Sheeting: Unfinished.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.
Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening
dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings and instructed by the manufacturer.
B.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install louvers level and plumb.
C.
Secure louvers in opening framing with concealed fasteners, removable for maintenance
purposes.
D.
Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and
diversion of moisture to exterior.
10210-2
E.
F.
G.
Install insect screening to interior of louver. Hinge screens for access.
Install insect screens to intake and exhaust louvers.
Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07900.
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Clean surfaces and components.
END OF SECTION
10210-3
SECTION 10441
PLASTIC SIGNS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Engraved plastic signs.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
C.
Submit two samples illustrating full size sample sign, of type, style and color specified
including method of attachment.
D.
E.
Include installation template and hardware.
A.
B.
C.
Package signs, labeled in name groups.
D.
Store adhesive tape at ambient room temperatures.
A.
Do not install signs when ambient temperature is below 70 degrees F (21 degrees C).
Maintain this minimum during and after installation of signs.
1.05
A.
Comply with applicable codes and ADA as required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
APCO.
B.
ASI Sign Systems.
C.
Nelson-Harkins.
D.
2.02 ENGRAVED SIGNS
A.
Engraved Signs: Laminated colored plastic; total thickness of 0.125 inch on 1/8 inch Back
Plate; Radiused edges; lettering engraved through face material to expose core color.
Characters formed to Helvetica style.
1.
Face Color: To be selected by Owner.
2.
Core Color: To be selected by Owner.
2.03 LETTERING
A.
Style: Upper case Helvetica, medium.
B.
Colors: To be selected.
10441-1
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Mounting Hardware: Brass screws.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install signs after surfaces are finished, in locations scheduled.
C.
Locate sign on wall surface, level, 60 inches from finished floor to centerline of sign.
Consult Architect for exact locations.
D.
Clean and polish.
3.03 SCHEDULES
A.
Refer to Finish Schedule and detail 5, sheet A-8.1. Consult Owner for final room names.
END OF SECTION
10441-2
SECTION 10522
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fire extinguishers.
B.
Cabinets.
C.
Accessories.
A.
Section 06112 – Framing & Sheathing: Roughed-in wall openings.
B.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking and shims.
C.
Section 09900 - Painting.
1.3 REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B.
UL 8 - Foam Fire Extinguishers.
C.
UL 92 - Fire Extinguisher and Booster Hose.
D.
UL 154 - Carbon Dioxide Fire Extinguishers.
E.
UL 299 - Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers.
F.
UL 626 - 2 1/2 Gallon Stored Pressure, Water Type Fire Extinguishers.
G.
UL 711 - Rating and Fire Testing of Fire Extinguishers.
H.
UL 1093 - Halogenated Agent Fire Extinguishers.
1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed
cabinets, wall bracket mounted measurements, location.
C.
Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features, color and finish, anchorage details
and type.
1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
B.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening
coordination requirements.
C.
1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Operation and Maintenance Data.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification
requirements.
A.
Provide units conforming with UL 711, UL 92.
10522-1
A.
Conform to applicable code for requirements for extinguishers.
A.
Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher
ingredients.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
J.L. Industries, Inc.
2.
Larsen’s Manufacturing Company
3.
Potter-Roemer
4.
Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Product options and substitutions.
Substitutions: Permitted.
2.2
EXTINGUISHERS
Coordinate types with locations shown on the drawings.
A.
Water Type: UL 626, Stainless steel tank, pressurized, including hose and nozzle; Class 2A,
Size 2.5 gal.
B.
Dry Chemical Type: UL 299, Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage; Class B:C, Size 10.
C.
Foam Type: UL 299, Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage; Class B:C, Size 10.
D.
Carbon Dioxide Type: UL 154, Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage; Class B:C, size 10.
E.
Halogenated Type: UL 1093, Stainless steel tank, with pressure gage; Class B:C, size 10.
F.
Extinguisher Finish: No. 4 finish.
2.3
CABINETS
A.
Metal: Formed sheet steel, primed; 18 gage thick base metal.
B.
Configuration: Recessed, Semi-recessed, or Surface type as shown on the drawings, sized to
accommodate accessories.
C.
Trim Type: Returned to wall surface.
D.
Door: 18 gage thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; lock with full glass access.
E.
Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float.
F.
Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet.
G.
Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim and
door stiles.
H.
Pre-drill for anchors.
I.
Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide catch.
J.
Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.
K.
Glaze doors with resilient channel gasket glazing.
L.
Finishing Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Primed for field paint finish.
M.
Finishing Cabinet Interior: enamel per Section 09900.
2.4
ACCESSORIES
A.
Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, enamel finish.
B.
Extinguisher Theft Alarm: Battery operated alarm, 10 second delay for disarming, activated
by opening cabinet door.
10522-2
C.
PART 3
Provide Cabinet Signage.
EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
starting work.
B.
Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, from finished floor to [inside bottom of
cabinet.
C.
Secure rigidly in place.
D.
Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.
E.
Position cabinet signage as directed.
END OF SECTION
10522-3
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Toilet & bath accessories.
B.
Attachment hardware.
1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION
A.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Installation of concealed anchor devices.
A.
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: In wall framing and plates for support of
accessories.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM A123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from
rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars and Strips.
B.
ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
C.
ANSI/ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Assembled Steel Products.
D.
ANSI/ASTM B456 - Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and
Nickel Plus Chromium.
E.
ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.
F.
ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Provide product data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment
methods.
C.
1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate the work of this Section with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to
receive anchor attachments.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Bobrick.
B.
Hallmack.
C.
Nutone.
D.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Sheet Steel: ANSI/ASTM A366.
B.
Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A167, Type 304.
10800-1
C.
Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
B.
Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints.
C.
Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.
D.
Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.
E.
Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
F.
Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
G.
Hot dip galvanize exposed and painted ferrous metal and fastening devices.
2.04 FACTORY FINISHING
A.
Galvanizing: ANSI/ASTM A123 A386 to 1.25 oz/sq yd (380 g/sq m).
B.
Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean, spray apply one coat primer and bake.
C.
Chrome/Nickel Plating: ANSI/ASTM B456, Type SC 2 polished finish.
D.
Stainless Steel: Polished finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the
manufacturer.
B.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site at appropriate time for building-in.
B.
Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
C.
Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install fixtures, accessories and items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
3.04
SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to schedule on sheet LC-2.1
END OF SECTION
10800-2
SECTION 10916
CLOSET SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Vinyl coated, steel rod ventilated shelving.
B.
Hardware and Accessories.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06114 – Wood Blocking & Curbing.
B.
C.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems.
1.04
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Shelf size: 12 inches wide x length shown on plans.
B.
Support brackets: Spacing 24 inches on center and at corners.
1.05
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on shelving & accessories.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate component installation.
1.07
WARRANTY
A.
Provide Five (5) year warranty under provisions of Section 01700.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Clairson International, Product: 'Closetmaid'.
B.
Rigid Rak.
C.
Substitutions: Under Provisions of Section 01600.
2.02
MATERIALS
A.
Steel: Grade C-1006 bright basic cold drawn steel wire, tensile strength minimum 100,000
psi.
B.
Cross Deck Spacing: 1 inch increments.
C.
Vinyl Coating: Non-exudating formula PVC, thickness 7 - 11 mils (fluidized bed process),
Color: 'White'.
D.
Hardware & Accessories: Mounting clips, end caps, support brackets, and screw fasteners
as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Shelf Size: 12 inch deep x closet length.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify substrate conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
10916-1
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
B.
Install shelving plumb and square.
C.
Secure shelving with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. At gypsum board walls
anchor fasteners to wood studs or blocking. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lbs.
D.
Bolt adjoining shelf units together to provide rigid installation.
E.
Install support brackets and accessories.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of Section 01700.
END OF SECTION
10916-2
SECTION 11452
APPLIANCES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Appliances.
B.
Installation including connections to utilities.
A.
Section 15000 - Mechanical: Mechanical components for connections.
B.
Section 16000 - Electrical: Electrical components for connections.
1.03 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS.
A.
Furnish inserts and anchors to Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing for installation.
B.
Furnish mechanical components to Section 15000 - Mechanical for installation.
C.
Furnish electrical components to Section 16000 - Electrical for installation.
1.04 RELATED WORK
A.
Section 07900 - Sealants.
B.
Section 15000 - Mechanical: Mechanical services and connections to equipment.
C.
Section 16000 - Electrical: Electrical services and connections to equipment.
1.05 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-resisting Chromium- nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and
Strip.
B.
ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
C.
ASTM A446 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process, Structural
(Physical) Quality.
D.
American Gas Association Standards.
E.
USEPA Energy Star Guidelines
A.
All appliances shall meet the standards of and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
(UL).
1.08 SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit samples for color selection.
C.
A.
B.
Include data on care of finished surfaces.
11452-1
A.
B.
Store products under provisions of Section 01600.
C.
Store products clear of floor in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, or sagging.
D.
Coordinate size of access and route to place of installation.
1.12 WARRANTY
A.
Provide manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700 as scheduled.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage of scheduled equipment, including disconnection of defective
unit, and connection of replacement unit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
A.
General Electric Company.
B.
Whirlpool.
D.
2.02 EQUIPMENT
A.
Refer to schedule at end of this Section.
B.
Provide rough-in hardware, supports and connections, attachment devices, closure trim, and
accessories.
2.06 SERVICE ACCESSORIES AND CONNECTIONS
A.
Provide control switch or starter on each motor-driven appliance or heating element, in
accordance with UL requirements.
B.
Provide internal wiring for equipment, including electrical devices, wiring controls, and
switches to a common junction box.
C.
Provide suitable length of three wire cord with plugs to match building receptacles.
D.
Provide lamps for fixtures in equipment. Provide automatic door switches for refrigeration
units.
E.
Provide equipment with connection terminals, so that connections of plumbing, gas, steam,
electrical, ventilation, and refrigeration services can be made.
2.07 FINISHES
A.
Metal Degrease and phosphate etch followed by primer and minimum two coats factory
baked epoxy enamel, White color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A.
Verify ventilation outlets, service connections, and supports are correct and in required
location.
B.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Use anchoring devices appropriate for equipment and expected usage.
B.
Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions under provisions of Section
11452-2
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
01400.
Weld and grind joints in stainless steel work tight, without open seams, where necessary due
to limitations of sheet sizes or installation requirements.
Sequence installation and erection to ensure mechanical and electrical connections are
achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.
Cut, fit, and patch where necessary. Coordinate work with others.
Cut and drill tops, backs, or other elements for service outlets, fixtures, and fittings.
Provide cutting and patching of items of this Section required for the installation or services
of equipment.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust equipment and apparatus to ensure proper working order and conditions.
B.
Remove masking or protective covering from finished surfaces.
C.
Remove and replace equipment creating noise or vibration.
D.
Wash and clean equipment.
E.
Polish glass, plastic, hardware and accessories, fixtures and fittings.
3.06 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE
A.
Refrigerator – compact refrigerator, 4.3 cu.ft. capacity. GE model GMR04AAMWW.
Energy Star Rated.
END OF SECTION
11452-3
SECTION 12390
CASEWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Production manufactured casework including hardware.
B.
Pre-finished surfaces.
C.
Countertops.
1.02
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI 161.1 - Minimum Construction & Performance Standards for Kitchen & Vanity
cabinets.
B.
ANSI/BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 06114 - Rough Carpentry: Grounds and support framing.
B.
C.
Section 11452 – Appliances.
D.
Section 15000 - Mechanical: Plumbing, sinks and trim.
1.04 MOCKUP
A.
Provide sample base cabinet, upper cabinet, countertop, with hardware installed.
B.
Accepted units will establish minimum standard of quality for the work.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Include components dimensions, profiles, finishes, and hardware.
C.
D.
E.
Submit two samples 18 x 18 inches in size illustrating finishes, colors, trim.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Cabinets
1.
Summerhill Cabinets (by Merillat)
2.
IXL Cabinets (by Triangle Pacific), Style: “Premier series”
3.
IXL Cabinets (by Armstrong), Style: “Bali”
B.
Plastic Laminate
1.
Formica
2.
Nevamar
3.
Wilson Art
C.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Cabinet Construction: Softwood lumber and plywood gables and backing.
12390-1
B.
C.
Doors and Drawer Fronts: Hardwood raised or recessed panel.
Countertops: Square edge plastic laminate, square internal intersection to backsplash and
sidesplash, bevel nosing front over a 3/4 inch thick plywood substrate.
2.03 HARDWARE
A.
Shelf Standards and Clips, Drawer Guides, Door Hinges, Catches, Door and Drawer
Handles: Manufacturer's standard type, and color finish.
2.04 FIELD VERIFICATION
A.
Field verify measurements and existing conditions prior to fabrication.
2.05 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate casework to ensure durable & rigid unit & to permit plumb/level site installation.
B.
Align adjoining units for site assembly modules, to achieve tight hairline joints.
C.
Prepare units with anchor devices to permit ease of site assembly.
D.
Prepare countertops with joint devices to ensure hairline site joints.
E.
Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, & items. Verify
locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges.
F.
Wall and Base Cabinet Construction.
2.06 FINISHES
A.
Sand work smooth and set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener
indentations.
B.
Stain and finish all exposed exterior and interior surfaces.
C.
Seal internal surfaces of cabinets.
D.
Seal surfaces in contact with cementitious materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01
INSTALLATION
A.
Set and secure casework in place rigid, plumb, and level.
B.
Use purpose designed fixture attachments for wall mounted components.
C.
Use threaded steel concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units,
counter tops, and accessories.
D.
Permanently fix cabinet & counter bases to walls & floor using appropriate angles &
anchorages.
B.
Carefully scribe casework which abuts other building materials, leaving gaps of 1/32 inch
maximum. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose.
END OF SECTION
12390-2
SECTION 12512
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
PART 1 GENERAL
A.
Horizontal slat louver blinds.
B.
Operating hardware.
A.
Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Window framing and interior reveals.
B.
Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wall opening head support blocking.
C.
Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Head, jamb, and sill wall opening reveals.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
FS AA-V-00200 - Venetian Blinds.
A.
Horizontal vinyl slat louver blinds installed at window openings, manual control of raising
and lowering by cord; blade angle adjustable by control wand.
1.06 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings indicating opening sizes, tolerances required, installation of blind at
window opening, method of attachment, clearances, and operation.
B.
C.
Submit product data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, operating features,
and accessories.
D.
A.
Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section
with three years documented experience.
1.08 FIELD SAMPLES
A.
Provide samples under provisions of Section 01300.
B.
Construct a field sample panel, full size illustrating complete blind assembly with operable
hardware and accessories.
C.
Provide field sample after submitted shop drawings are approved.
D.
Locate where directed.
E.
If accepted, field sample will demonstrate minimum standard for the Work. Field sample
may remain as part of the Work.
A.
B.
Deliver blinds wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or marring
of surfaces.
C.
12512-1
D.
Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat and blocked off ground to prevent sagging, twisting, or
warping.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish ten additional slats under provisions of Section 01700.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Bali Commercial Window Treatments. Model 'Mini-blinds'.
B.
Hunter Douglas. Model one vinyl mini-blinds.
C.
Levelor Window Treatment Systems. Model 'Contract Blind'.
D.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Louver Slats: One inch (25 mm) wide; 0.011 inch (0.280 mm) thick spring tempered
prefinished vinyl horizontal slats, with manufacturing burrs removed; radiused slat corners.
B.
Slat Support: Braided polyester yarn, ladder configuration.
C.
Head Rail Housing: Prefinished, formed steel box, internally fitted with hardware, pulleys
and bearings for blind operation.
D.
Cord: Braided polyester fiber cord, continuous loop.
E.
Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic, hexagonal shape, non-removable type, length of
window opening height less 12 inches (300 mm).
F.
Head Support Bracket: Overhead head rail housing attachment, provided by manufacturer.
G.
Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.
2.03 FACTORY FINISHING
A.
Blind Slat and Head Rail Housing: Color to be selected by Owner.
B.
Control Wand: Clear color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings are ready to receive the work.
B.
Do not commence fabrication until field measurements are confirmed.
C.
Ensure structural supports are correctly placed.
D.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Secure in place with flush countersunk concealed fasteners.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
B.
Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
3.04 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 01650.
12512-2
B.
Adjust blinds for smooth operation.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Clean work under provisions of 01700.
END OF SECTION
12512-3
Avalon Apartments, Washington, D.C.
SECTION 15010
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.00
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The following Drawings indicate the work required under this Division.
MLC1.1, MLC2.1
And All Other Contract Drawings.
B.
C.
Certain items of work pertaining to the work of this Division are provided under
other Divisions of the Specification. These include, but are not limited to the
following:
1.
Concrete work for equipment bases, thrust blocks, meter pads, valve
boxes, etc.
2.
Installation of access doors in finished construction.
3.
Installation of pipe sleeves in walls and floors.
4.
Wiring of mechanical equipment. (Motor starters furnished under this
Section.)
5.
Framing of openings in walls, floors, roof for ductwork, piping, fans, etc.
6.
Chases, soffits, furred spaces required to conceal work of this Division.
7.
Flashings for plumbing vents, roof curbs, etc.
8.
Wiring of sprinkler system controls, accessory equipment.
Materials furnished under other Divisions and installed by this Division include, but
are not limited to:
1.
D.
Refer to Architectural Specifications and Drawings to determine items
furnished under other Sections that will require work under this Division
and include such work.
Complete Utility connections as indicated or needed, extension to Project,
metering as required, and connection to building systems, including:
1.
Apply for all services and pay for all fees, assessments, and charges of the
Utility for each connection, all in a timely manner and according to the
Project Schedule.
15010-1
E.
F.
1.02
1.03
2.
Provide and install all metering, valves, accessories as required by Utility.
Install entire service in accordance with the Utility's requirements or other
applicable regulation.
3.
All necessary coordination with Utility to determine scope of work provided
by Utility and the part provided by Contractor so that a complete Utility
connection is made.
Provide coordination for Mechanical and Electrical installations. Provide additional
coordination drawings, as directed by Architect, in areas of potential interferences.
All work shall comply with applicable codes and regulations, including, but not
limited to the following:
1.
Government of the District of Columbia Building, Fire Safety, and Health
Codes, as amended, including all codes, standards and regulations
referenced therein D.C. Building Code 2008.
2.
Requirements of Local, State, and Federal authorities having jurisdiction
over the Work.
3.
Current regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA).
4.
Requirements of affected Public Utility Companies.
5.
Special requirements set down by the Owner, the Owner's Insurance
Carrier, or other concerned entities.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions of The Contract, and General
Requirements shall apply and be binding to the Contractor and their
subcontractors, vendors or suppliers who performs work under this Division.
B.
Where items of the General or Special Conditions are repeated in this Section, it is
intended to call particular attention to or qualify them. It is not intended that any
parts of the General or Special Conditions be assumed to be omitted if not
repeated in this Section.
INTENT
A.
Intent of the Specifications and Drawings is to call for finished work, tested and
ready for operation.
B.
Material and equipment mentioned in Specifications or shown on the Drawings
shall be furnished new, completely installed and adjusted, and left in a clean, safe,
and satisfactory condition ready for operation. All supplied appliances and
connections of every sort necessary shall be furnished and installed to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner.
15010-2
1.04
C.
Apparatus, appliances, material, or work not shown on the Drawings but
mentioned in Specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessory items such
as valves, unions, fittings, etc., necessary to make the work complete, serviceable,
and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even though not particularly
specified or shown, shall be provided and installed without additional cost to the
Owner.
D.
Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for the proper
installation and operation of the work shall be included as if specified herein.
E.
Prior to submission of bids, give written notice to Architect of any materials or
apparatus believed to be inadequate, unsuitable, or in violation of laws, ordinances, rules, or regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction over the work; or
any necessary items believed omitted. In absence of such notice, it is mutually
agreed that the cost of all required and necessary items has been included in the
bid and that all systems specified and shown will function satisfactorily without
claim for additional cost to the Owner.
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following words or terms contractions used for convenience throughout this
specification are, unless specifically noted to the contrary, defined as follows:
“Architect” means Crosskey Architects, Hartford, Connecticut 06103.
“Engineer” means Acorn Consulting Engineers, Inc., West Simsbury, Connecticut
06092.
“contractor” , as used herein, means the Prime Sub-contractor responsible for the
work of that specific section of Division 15.
"furnish" or "provide" or "supply" means to supply, erect, install, connect, test, and
place into operation the particular item or work referred to unless otherwise
specified.
"work" means all of the labor, material, equipment, and supplies needed to fully
execute the intent of this Specification.
“Regulating authorities” or “authorities”, means all governmental, utility and
insuring authorities having jurisdiction.
"piping" includes all pipe, fittings, valves, hangers, insulation, and other
accessories relating to piping, and the labor to install same.
"concealed" means hidden from view in chases, furred spaces, hung ceilings,
embedded in construction, or buried underground. It is intended that all
piping, equipment, and accessory items be concealed unless specifically
15010-3
indicated otherwise on the Drawings.
"exposed" means "not concealed" as defined above. work in tunnels, crawl spaces,
within cabinetry, or otherwise accessible to view shall be considered
"exposed" unless specifically noted otherwise.
“ductwork” means, in addition to ducts, all fittings, dampers, air control devices,
hangers, flexible connectors and other accessories related to such ductwork.
1.05
DRAWINGS
A.
Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope and
general arrangement of the work. Deviations from the depicted arrangement shall
be approved by the Architect.
B.
Location of items shown on the Drawings, or called for in the Specifications, not
definitely fixed by dimension, are approximate only. Exact location necessary to
secure the best conditions and serviceability shall be determined in the field and
shall have the review of the Architect.
C.
Follow the Drawings in laying out the work. Check Architectural, Structural, and
other trade Drawings to verify spaces available so that maximum head room and
service access can be maintained. Where space conditions appear inadequate,
notify Architect before proceeding with the work.
D.
Work on the Drawings is intended to be approximately correct to the scale of the
Drawings. Figured dimensions and large scale details shall take precedence over
layouts on smaller scale Drawings. Dimensional information shall be taken only
from the Architectural or Structural Drawings and details.
E.
Typical details shall apply to each and every occurrence of the item. Drawings
make use of symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate and define various items
of work. These have no dimensional significance, nor do they necessarily delineate
each and every item required to make the work complete. Work shall be installed
according to the diagrammatic intent of the Drawings, in conformity with the
applicable dimensions, and as required by the finally approved shop and fabrication
drawings.
F.
No interpretation shall be made from the limitations of symbols and diagrams that
any necessary element or work has been excluded.
G.
If directed by the Architect or Owner, make reasonable modifications in the layout
of the work to avoid conflict with work of other trades or for better execution of the
work.
H.
Refer to Drawings and Specifications of all other trades to ascertain if any items
15010-4
provided or installed therein require work under this Division so that the final
installation will be a complete job, ready for operation, completely coordinated and
interconnected. It is understood that indication of any item on the Drawings or in
the Specifications carries with it the instruction to furnish and install completely,
regardless of whether this instruction is explicitly stated.
1.06
I.
No statement in Drawings or Specifications, or any omission in either should be
misunderstood as relieving the Contractor from providing a complete job. No
inclusion, exclusion or limitation in the language of the Drawings or Specifications
shall be interpreted as meaning that any required item or accessory necessary to
complete any required system is omitted.
J.
The use of words in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other
indications allude to more than one item being needed.
VISITING THE SITE
A.
1.07
Prior to submitting a bid, visit the site of the work, inspect the Existing Building
and conditions so as to determine if these conditions will affect the work. Bidders
are cautioned that they will be held responsible for any assumptions made
regarding existing conditions.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Within thirty (30) days after Award of Contract, submit to the Architect for review
a list of manufacturers of all materials and equipment proposed for use on the
project. Indicate on submittal which items are substitutions.
B.
A review, without exception, of this list does not constitute approval, nor does it
guarantee acceptance of the shop drawings when submitted.
C.
The Contractor's intent to purchase the exact make specified does not relieve him
from the responsibility to submit this list. Failure to submit this list will require
the Contractor to supply the exact item specified as the basis for design.
D.
Submittal of items which differ from those specified or indicated as the basis for
design carries the implicit guarantee that the substituted item will provide the
intended service and is compatible with other items or systems interfacing with it.
E.
When proposing a substitute item, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs
of accommodating the substitution, including, but not limited to, space and accessibility, modifications required to other systems, structural adequacy and the like.
F.
If substitutions require the Architect or Engineer to prepare sketches or revised
drawings in order to become acceptable, the cost of such sketches, drawings, or
engineering shall be borne by the Contractor.
15010-5
G.
1.08
When substitutions require Engineer or Architect to spend an inordinate time for
review of substitutions, the cost of review over four (4) hours will be charged to the
Contractor who made the submittal.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
After acceptance of List of Manufacturers required under paragraph 1.07(A) of this
Section, and prior to delivery of materials and equipment to the project site, submit
nine (9) copies of shop drawings of each item for review by the Architect.
B.
Each submittal shall contain a complete list of all materials contained within.
Include intended use for each item.
C.
Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's scale drawings, cuts or catalogs,
including descriptive literature and complete characteristics of equipment, including, but not limited to, dimensions, capacity, code compliance, motor and drive
and testing, construction, electrical characteristics, support, all as required for this
project.
D.
Architect may designate submittal of physical samples for review on items where
actual color, texture or other characteristics might not be adequately described by a
drawing or written material. Upon approval of a sample, each and every item of
that sort must be identical to the approved sample.
E.
Certified performance curves shall be submitted for all fan and pumping
equipment. Certified ratings shall be submitted for all operating equipment.
F.
Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for review shall
be labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used,
Section and Article Number of Specification governing, Contractor's name and
name of project.
G.
Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of
measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, said review
does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said review does not in
any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility of furnishing material or
performing work according to Contract Documents.
H.
Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not be cause for
an extension of Contract Time, and no claim by reason of such default will be
allowed.
I.
Submittals for all systems which require the interconnection of three or more
devices shall include a system block diagram. The diagram shall be of the one line
type and with sufficient detail to show interfaces and method of operation.
15010-6
J.
1.09
1.10
1.11
Material or equipment installed prior to review shall be liable for removal and
replacement at no extra charge to the Owner if the material or equipment does not
meet the intent of Drawings and Specifications.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
Equipment and materials furnished or required shall be new, without blemish or
fault. Equipment shall bear labels attesting to approval by Underwriters Laboratories, AGA, or other recognized testing laboratory where specified or required to
have such approval.
B.
Where no specific indication as to type or quality is indicated, a first-class article
shall be furnished.
C.
All equipment of a type shall be products of a single manufacturer.
D.
Each item shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate showing name, ratings, model
numbers and serial numbers. Nameplates of suppliers or distributors will not be
acceptable.
E.
Provide line sized valves and unions or flanges on each pipe connection to items of
equipment requiring piped connections.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Obtain from the Architect a clean set of blue-line prints of the work and during
construction indicate any deviations in routing, arrangement, elevation or size
thereon.
B.
"As-Built" drawings shall be kept up to date concurrently with the execution of the
work and turned over to the Architect for review and approval at the conclusion of
the project. Failure to keep up to date on these drawings will require the Contractor
to reconstruct his installations, make whatever investigations to accurately locate
the installed work are needed, even if he has to cut into finished construction. All
costs for this work shall be borne by the Contractor who failed to keep "as-built"
drawings up to date.
C.
These drawings shall indicate the exact location and elevation of all utilities, sewers
under floor slabs or buried on the site. Dimensions shall refer to the finished walls
of the building or to finished grade or floor level. Include, as well, the final location
of ducts and pipes concealed in chases, walls or above permanent ceilings.
D.
The location of all valves and cleanouts shall be indicated by dimension.
LAWS, ORDINANCES, CODES, PERMITS, FEES AND REGULATIONS
15010-7
1.12
1.13
A.
Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits, pay all taxes and fees in connection
with the work. File all Contract Documents, prepare documents and obtain all
approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction over the work. Obtain
Certificates of Inspection and deliver to Architect before Application for Final
Payment.
B.
Materials and workmanship shall comply with the rules and regulations of the
National Board of Fire Underwriters, applicable Building and Life Safety Codes,
the requirements of Boards of Health, Fire Insurance Rating Organizations, Local
and State Fire Marshal, and the requirements of all governmental departments
having jurisdiction. If contract requirements are in excess of the minimum
standards of Codes, the Contract Provisions shall apply.
C.
Provide complete, working utility connections as described in 1.01 (D) above.
ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
A.
Pay all royalties and defend all suits and claims for infringement of any patent
rights and save the Owner harmless on account thereof.
B.
If it is observed that a process or article specified is an infringement of a valid
patent, promptly notify the Architect in writing. If work is performed knowing it is
an infringement of a patent, all costs arising therefrom shall be borne by the
Contractor.
STANDARD REFERENCES
A.
Certain items may be specified or indicated by reference to recognized standards.
These may include the following:
AGA
API
ASA
ASHRAE
ASME
ASTM
AWS
AWWA
AMCA
NBFU
SBI
IBR
American Gas Association
American Petroleum Institute
American Standards Association
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning
Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Welding Society
American Water Works Association
Air Moving and Conditioning Association
National Board of Fire Underwriters
Steel Boiler Institute
Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
15010-8
STI
Steel Tank Institute
NACR
National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NEC
National Electrical Code
ETL
Electrical Testing Laboratories
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
PFMA
Power Fan Manufacturer's Association
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
FM
Factory Mutual Insurance Company
IRI
Industrial Risk Insurers
AABC Associated Air Balance Council
B.
1.14
INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
1.15
1.16
1.17
The particular standard referred to shall be the latest legally defined revision to that
standard.
Questions or disagreements arising as to interpretation of the intent of the Contract
Documents, or the kind and quality of work required, shall be decided by the
Architect whose interpretation shall be final, conclusive, and binding.
PROCEDURE OF WORK
A.
Work shall proceed in a planned, orderly manner as approved by the Architect.
B.
Procedure and scheduling of the work shall be coordinated with other trades as
approved by the Architect, and may be adjusted from time to time to meet job
conditions.
CHANGES TO THE WORK
A.
During the progress of the work, the Architect may make changes, alterations,
additions or deletions to the drawn or specified work after having agreed to an equitable allowance to be added or deducted from the contract price.
B.
Claims for extra cost to cover extra work will not be allowed unless specifically
authorized in writing by the Architect prior to the execution of such additional
work.
COORDINATION OF TRADES
A.
Cooperate with other trades in the interchange of information and requirements in a
timely manner.
B.
Participate in preparation of Project Coordination Drawings as more fully
15010-9
described in 1.01 (E), above.
1.18
1.19
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A.
Be responsible for maintaining and protecting equipment and materials stored or
installed at the project site, from loss or damage of all causes, until final acceptance
by Owner.
B.
Be responsible for protection of finished work of other trades from damage or
defacement caused by operations. Remedy all such damages at no cost to Owner.
C.
New roof penetrations shall conform with the existing roof system manufacturer’s
requirements.
Provide documentation form the existing roofing system
manufacturer at the completion of the project to indicate the integrity of roofing
system has been maintained, and that the roof warranty is in force for the remaining
warranty period. Provide all material, labor, testing and expenses necessary to
satisfy the roofing system manufacturer’s requirements so to maintain the Owner’s
roof bond.
CUTTING, PATCHING, PAINTING, EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING
A.
Cutting, patching, painting, excavating and backfilling shall be done under other
Divisions unless specifically noted otherwise.
B.
Make sure that sleeves are set, chases and openings provided for, and trenching
requirements are established so not to delay progress of the project.
C.
Failure to provide information to other trades making it necessary to cut or patch
finished work shall be cause for the cost of the cutting and patching to be borne by
the Contractor failing to provide the information.
15010-10
1.20
1.21
TEMPORARY OPENINGS
A.
Determine if any temporary openings will be required for admission of equipment
or materials and notify the Architect of these requirements.
B.
Failure to give sufficient notice to arrange for these openings shall result in this
Contractor's assumption of all costs associated with making and repairing such
temporary openings.
PIPE EXPANSION
A.
1.22
Install piping systems to allow for freedom of movement during expansion and
contraction without springing. Provide swing joints, expansion joints, loops, or
compensators, complete with guides, where necessary to allow for expansion or
contraction.
INSTRUCTION BOOKS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Furnish three (3) sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals in hard cover
covering all Mechanical Systems in the project. Include manufacturer's approved
submittal of each item. Submit for review of Architect.
B.
Manuals shall contain, as a minimum, the following:
C.
1.
Description of the project and major sub-systems.
2.
Descriptive text covering the filling, purging, starting, and adjusting of each
system, and procedures for shutting down and making systems secure.
3.
Copies of all valve tag lists and equipment schedules.
4.
Copies of all control system diagrams and description of operation.
5.
A schedule of maintenance based on the manufacturer's recommendations,
showing what work is to be performed and at what intervals.
6.
Copies of the finally approved submittal for each item, together with the
manufacturer's installation, operation, and maintenance instructions and
parts lists.
7.
List of Firm names, addresses, telephone numbers to be contacted for
regular or emergency service, or purchase of parts.
Manuals shall be arranged in one or more three-ring binders, completely indexed as
follows:
15010-11
D.
1.23
1.24
1.25
1.
General information; Items 1, 2, 3, & 7 above.
2.
Control system information; Item 4.
3.
Approved submittal, maintenance, and parts information; Items 5 & 6.
4.
Each Section shall be identified by a permanent index tab.
5.
Each item within a major Section shall be separately indexed for quick
reference.
Provide adequate written and/or verbal instructions to the Owner's operating
personnel and such others as the Owner may designate. As a minimum, provide for
three (3), eight hour working days of instructions. Individual equipment or systems
may require additional or different periods of instruction.
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Install work so that all parts are readily accessible for inspection, maintenance and
service.
B.
Locate connections, valves, unions, strainers, etc. so as to be readily accessible.
C.
Where items are located in non-access spaces (ceilings, tunnels, chases), provide
approved access doors or panels. Group items requiring access to limit the number
of access points.
D.
Access doors shall have the same fire rating as the wall, floor, or ceiling involved.
Doors shall be of size required, but no less than 12" X 12" minimum size. Access
doors shall be delivered to the Contractor for installation.
ELECTRICAL WORK FOR MECHANICAL TRADES
A.
Each trade supplying electrically operated equipment for installation and wiring
under Division 16 shall furnish sufficiently detailed information and wiring
diagrams in a timely manner.
B.
Equipment including a number of electrical items in a single enclosure or a
common base shall be supplied internally wired as a unit to numbered terminals.
C.
Electrical devices having a mechanical element such as a float valve, pressure
switch, etc., shall be installed and mechanically connected under this Division and
left ready for wiring under Division 16.
MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROLS
15010-12
A.
Motors shall conform to all applicable regulations and be suitable for the load, duty,
voltage characteristics, service, and location intended.
B.
Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be rated for continuous duty at rated
service factor with a temperature rise not exceeding NEMA standards. Motors shall
be able to withstand momentary overloads of 125% of rating without damage or
overheating.
C.
Motors 1/3 HP and smaller shall be capacitor start, capacitor run or permanent split
capacitor type, designed to run at 120 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz.
D.
Each trade furnishing motor driven equipment shall provide an approved starting
device and deliver same to electrical Contractor for installation and wiring.
E.
Single phase motor starters shall be manual "TT" type toggle switch with melting
alloy overload device, unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Polyphase motor starters shall be magnetic across-the-line type having melting
alloy overload relays on each leg. Starters shall be gravity dropout with double-break silver alloy contacts. Overload units shall be interchangeable and starter
shall be made inoperative if overload element is removed.
G.
Single phase motors requiring automatic control interlocking shall be magnetic
across-the-line type having the same requirements as polyphase motor starters.
H.
Provide, for each magnetic starter requiring automatic control, one normally open
and one normally closed auxiliary contact.
I.
All motor starters shall be furnished in NEMA 1 enclosure with reset button in
cover unless otherwise indicated elsewhere.
J.
Certain large or special purpose motors may require reduced voltage starting. In
this case, the appropriate section of the equipment specifications will give complete
specifications on the type of motor controller required.
K.
All motor starters being automatically controlled shall be provided with a fused
control circuit transformer, 120 or 24 volts as required by control system. Control
circuit transformers shall also be provided in all starters operating at line voltages
over 250 volts, whether or not automatically controlled.
L.
Provide premium energy efficient motors. Motor name plates shall indicate the
nominal efficiency per NEMA Standard MG-12.54. Minimum efficiency shall be
as follows:
Horsepower
Nominal Efficiency
15010-13
1.0
1.5
2.0
3.0
5.0
7.5
1.26
1.27
1.28
85.5
86.5
86.5
89.5
89.5
91.0
TESTS
A.
Test all piping and equipment as required by the various Sections of the
Specifications.
B.
Tests to be witnessed by and be to the satisfaction of the Architect or his designee,
and others having legal jurisdiction.
C.
Pressure tests shall be applied to piping before insulating and before connecting to
equipment having pressure ratings lower than the test pressure.
D.
Work shall be tested, repaired, and retested until an approved test is achieved.
E.
Damages caused by testing or failure of a test shall be repaired to the satisfaction of
the Architect, at no cost to the Owner.
F.
In general, piping systems shall be tested to 150% of the maximum expected
operating or surge pressure, or 125 psi, whichever is greater. Utility connections
shall be tested in accordance with the Utility's requirements.
G.
Completed systems shall be tested to demonstrate proper operation, capacity, and
acceptable noise and vibration levels. Insofar as possible, systems normally
operated during certain seasons of the year shall be tested during that season.
H.
Costs for all testing shall be borne by the appropriate Contractor.
QUIET OPERATION
A.
Fans and motors shall be isolated from the building structure by approved means.
Noise and hum of equipment shall be absorbed or attenuated so as not to be objectionable.
B.
Where noise or vibration levels are considered objectionable by the Architect, they
shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner.
USE OF INSTALLATION BY OWNER
15010-14
A.
1.29
1.30
1.31
Owner shall have the privilege of using any part of the work when sufficiently
complete, but such use shall not be considered as an acceptance of the work in lieu
of a written certificate from the Architect.
CLEANUP
A.
Piping, ducts and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, inside and out, before
being placed into operation.
B.
Any stoppage in a system shall be removed and any work damaged in the course of
such removal shall be restored to its original condition at no additional cost to the
Owner.
C.
Keep site free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. Periodically clean
work areas. At conclusion of work remove all tools, construction equipment, surplus materials from the site and leave in clean condition.
GUARANTEE AND SERVICE
A.
Guarantee all work to be free from defects in workmanship and/or materials and
that all apparatus will achieve the capacity and characteristics specified. If during
the period of One (1) Year (or other term specified elsewhere) from certificate of
completion of the work, defects appear, remedy such defects without cost to the
Owner. In default thereof, the Owner may have such corrective work done and
charge the cost to the Contractor. Indemnify Owner for property damage which
might result from such a defect which made repairs necessary.
B.
Certain equipment will require guarantee periods exceeding one year due to the
need for seasonal operation. In such case, the guarantee period shall extend through
one, complete, continuous operating season.
C.
Air conditioning compressors shall be furnished with the Manufacturer's Extended
Warranty covering five (5) years from date of project acceptance. Deliver warranty
certificate to Owner's authorized representative.
INSURANCE
A.
1.32
Fully insure all employees, material and finished work as required by the General
Conditions of the Contract.
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING, HOISTING
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, the work or each Section shall include all scaffolding,
rigging, hoisting and services necessary to deliver, install, erect in place all items of
equipment. Remove such handling materials when no longer needed.
15010-15
END OF SECTION
15010-16
SECTION 15100
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
The General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions apply to this
Section of the Specifications.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This Section describes various basic materials and equipment for use in the
Project's Mechanical Systems.
B.
Refer to the Schedules at the end of this Section for the selection of vibration
isolation, piping systems and valves applicable to this Project.
C.
Work included under this Section shall include, but not be limited to: Piping and
fittings, ductwork, valves, backflow preventers, hangers, supports, sleeves, fire
stopping systems, mechanical identification, seismic bracing, vibration isolation,
ductwork access doors, volume dampers and fire dampers.
D.
Coordination utilizing ductwork erection drawings.
RELATED WORK
A.
This Section is to be used in conjunction with the provisions of all other Sections of
Division 15, especially Section 15010, General Provisions - Mechanical.
B.
Refer also to any applicable portions of Division 16, Electrical Work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Provide submittals for review in accordance with the provisions of Section 15010.
B.
Submit manufacturers installation instructions under Section 15010.
C.
Submittals are required for the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Schedule of valve types proposed for each scheduled service.
Schedule of pipe and fitting types proposed for each service scheduled.
Schedule of vibration isolation for each unit and service scheduled.
Submit sketches of proposed seismic bracing systems for equipment, including
loads, etc. Sketches and calculation submittals shall bear the seal and signature of
15100-1
E.
1.04
a structural engineer licensed in the Government of the District of Columbia.
Provide documentation that vibration isolators and anchor bolts will have
properties sufficient to withstand required forces.
F.
Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical
identification.
G.
Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function,
and valve manufacturer's name and model number.
H.
Submit a shop drawing indicating vibration isolator locations, with static and
dynamic load on each isolator and description of product data.
I.
Submit shop drawings and samples of duct fittings, including particulars such as
gage sizes, welds, sealants, and configurations prior to start of work.
J.
Prepare and submit for approval, Ductwork Erection Drawings drawn to 1/4"=1'-0"
or larger. Coordinate all mechanical, electrical, structural, and architectural
services including those which are existing, in proximity to ductwork. Ductwork
Erection Drawings shall be reviewed and signed-off by all affected trades prior to
submission, and shall show new and existing building elements in proximity to
ductwork. The Contractor shall show Drawing Sections throughout areas where
ductwork is being erected, as well as indicate ductwork elevations on the Erection
Drawing Floor Plans. As a minimum the Ductwork Erection Drawings shall show
ceiling grids, mechanical equipment, light fixtures, sprinkler heads, and structure.
Indicate the above finish floor ceiling heights on the Erection Drawings.
Dimension the location of ductwork and equipment off the structural grid.
Elevation dimensions must be taken from the finished floor.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All items provided under the provisions of this Section shall be new, of domestic
manufacture, and shall be the products of recognized manufacturers of that item.
B.
All items of a similar class shall be the products of the same manufacturer. That is,
all valves, all accessory items, etc. shall be from the same source.
C.
Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable State
labor regulations.
D.
Employ licensed welders in accordance with Government of the District of
Columbia Occupational Licensing Act.
E.
Maintain ASHRAE criteria for average noise criteria curves for all equipment at
full load condition for selection of vibration isolators.
F.
Firestopping shall conform to ASTM E-814, "Standard Method of Fire Tests of
15100-2
Through Penetration Fire Stops".
G.
PART 2
2.00
2.01
2.02
Cleaning of inlet and outlets shall conform with The National Air Duct Cleaners
Association's Standard - Mechanical Cleaning of Non-Porous Air Conveyance
System Components.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
The following describes the requirements and materials for various items included
in the Project's Mechanical systems.
B.
It should be noted that this particular Project may not include all of the items listed.
Refer to the Valve and Materials Schedules at the end of this Section for those items
specific to this Project.
PIPE AND TUBING
E.
Schedule at end of this Section will refer to required types of pipe or tubing by letter
designation according to the following list:
F.
Steel, Black & Galvanized; ASTM A-53 or A-120; Plain or threaded ends. Each
length mill coated and capped.
G.
Copper Tube; Types K, L, M, and DWV, seamless. Shall be of domestic
origin. Contractor shall provide certificate of origin for all copper tube used for
potable water system.
H.
Plastic; Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), ASTM D1785, Weight as scheduled.
I.
Plastic; Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC), ASTM D1784, Weight as
scheduled.
J.
Cast Iron; Standard or Extra Heavy weight, tarred, plain or bell ends as scheduled.
K.
Cast Iron; Ductile Iron, cement lined, AWWA/ANSI C151, Class as scheduled.
L.
Corrugated Stainless Steel Tubing (CSST): ANSI/AGA LC1.
PIPE FITTINGS
A.
Schedule at end of this Section will refer to required types of pipe or tubing fittings
by letter designation according to the following list:
B.
Cast Iron Steam Pattern, threaded fittings, weight as scheduled.
15100-3
2.03
2.04
C.
Malleable Iron, threaded, ANSI/ASME B16.3, weight as scheduled.
D.
Forged Steel, welding ends, FS WW-P-521, for butt welding.
E.
Wrought Copper, solder joint, pressure fittings, ANSI/ASME B16.22.
F.
Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy, solder joint drainage fittings,
ANSI/ASME B16.29.
G.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fittings, for hubless pipe, sanitary service, CISPI #301.
H.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Fittings, for bell end pipe, with gasketed joints, ASTM C564.
I.
Ductile iron fittings, AWWA C110-87.
J.
Ductile Iron Fittings for Gasketed Joints, ANSI/AWWA C111.
K.
Flanged, Ductile Iron Fittings for mechanical joints on water service piping.
L.
Mechanical Joints and fittings for Piping Systems, Victaulic, or equal.
UNIONS AND COUPLINGS
A.
Pipe Size 2 inches and Under: 150 psi malleable iron for threaded ferrous piping;
bronze for copper or brass pipe soldered joints.
B.
Pipe Size Over 2 inches: 150 psi forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping;
bronze flanges for copper piping; synthetic rubber gaskets for gas service; 1/16
inch thick preformed synthetic rubber bonded to asbestos elsewhere.
C.
Grooved and Shouldered Pipe Ends: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage
and lock, designed to permit some angular deflection, contraction and expansion;
C-shape composition sealing gasket, steel bolts,, nuts and washers; galvanized
couplings for galvanized pipe.
VALVES
A.
Unless otherwise indicated, use valves suitable for 125 minimum psig WSP and
450 F. Valves for fire protection suitable for 175 psig WOG, UL approved.
B.
Valve Connections
1.
2.
Provide valves suitable to connect to adjoining piping as specified for pipe
joints. Use valves of full pipe line size.
Thread pipe sizes up to 2 inches.
3.
Flange pipe sizes over 2 inches.
4.
Solder end valves on copper tubing.
15100-4
5.
Use grooved body valves with mechanical grooved jointed
piping.
B.
Rated Gate, Globe, Check Valves
1.
2.
3.
C.
Ball Valve
1.
D.
Bronze or red brass, replaceable disc, hose spout end, chrome plated where
installed exposed.
2.
Non-freeze type with polished bronze recessed box, hose
thread spout, removable key. Length to place seat completely within
building.
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventer
1.
2.05
Iron body, brass plugs and washers, air tested, solder or screwed ends. Iron
body and plug, pressure lubricated type, flanged ends.
Drain Valve
1.
F.
Bronze body and brass ball, solder or screwing rods.
Cocks and Plug Valves
1.
E.
Gate Valves: Bronze, rising stem, inside screw, solid wedge, solder or
screwed ends. Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, OS&Y, solid wedge,
flanged ends.
Globe Valves: Bronze, rising stem, inside screw, composite renewable disc,
solder or screwed ends. Iron body, rising stem, bronze trim, OS&Y,
renewable composition disc, flanged ends.
Check Valves: Bronze, swing disc, solder or screwed ends. Iron body,
bronze trim, spring loaded, renewable composite disc, flanged ends.
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013 (AWWA
C506); bronze body, two independently operating, spring loaded check
valves. Diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between
check valves; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and test cocks.
Backflow preventer shall be Model #909 as manufactured by Watts.
SLEEVES
A.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: Form with 18 gage galvanized
steel.
B.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially
Wet Floors: Form with Schedule 40 steel pipe.
15100-5
2.06
2.07
C.
Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and
Fireproofing: Schedule 40 steel pipe.
D.
Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
E.
Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Form with galvanized steel.
FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A.
Provide material/system classified by UL to provide firestopping equal to time
rating of construction being penetrated.
B.
Firestopping system shall not emit toxic or combustible fumes, and be capable of
maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke water and toxic gases in
compliance with ASTM E-814 under their designation of UL 1479.
C.
Firestopping systems shall be flexible to allow for normal movement of building
structure and penetrating items without affecting the adhesion or integrity of the
system.
D.
Stuffing and Fire Stopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.
E.
Firestop Sealant:
F.
Intumescent Wrap: An aluminum foil-backed intumescent strip for plastic pipe,
insulated pipe or other combustible penetrating items.
G.
Damming Material: Adhesive filling and sealing foam, fire-resistant mineral
fiber.
An adhesive, one-part, silicone based, elastomeric sealant.
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes ½ to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split
ring.
B.
Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.
C.
Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger
rods; cast iron roll and stand for pipe sizes 6 inches and over.
D.
Wall Support for Pipe Sizes ½ to 2 Inches: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel
clamp; adjustable clevis.
E.
Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp, adjusting screws sizes 4 inches and larger.
F.
Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 to 5 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle,
15100-6
locknut nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support.
G.
Floor Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron roll and
stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support.
H.
Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel clevis, adjustable, copper plated.
I.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2 Inches and Smaller: 18 gauge galvanized steel shield
over insulation in 180 degree segments, minimum 12 inches long at pipe support.
J.
Shield for Insulated Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger (Except Cold Water Piping):
Pipe covering protective saddles.
K.
Shields for Insulated Cold Water Piping 2-1/2 Inches and Larger; Hard block
non-conducting saddles in 90 degree segments, 12 inch minimum length, block
thickness same as insulation thickness.
L.
Shields for Vertical Copper Pipe Risers: Sheet lead.
15100-7
2.08
INSERTS
A.
2.09
2.11
2.12
Inserts: Malleable iron or galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded
connection with lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching
to forms; size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.
HANGER RODS
A.
2.10
Steel Hanger Rods:
threaded.
Threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous
IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A.
Unless specified otherwise, identification shall conform with ANSI/ASME A13.1.
B.
Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on
dark contrasting background.
C.
Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter
with smooth edges.
D.
Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, performed to
fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction
arrow and fluid being conveyed.
E.
Plastic Pipe Tape Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive
adhesive backing and printed markings.
SEISMIC BRACING
A.
Bracing shall be fabricated from standard structural or trade sections.
B.
Attachments to masonry walls shall be by means of expansion shields and bolts.
C.
Attachment to building structure shall meet approval of Structural Engineer.
VIBRATION ISOLATION
A.
Type 1: Spring hanger rods based on Mason type PC30N hanger, shall
incorporate the following:
1.
2.
Vibration hanger shall be closed spring type with neoprene element in
series with a steel spring separated from the housing with neoprene
stabilizer.
Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to
permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30o arc before contacting the hole
15100-8
3.
4.
B.
4.
2.
3.
4.
Provide built-in vertical limit stops. Limit stops shall be out of contact
during normal operation.
Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment.
Capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment
erection. Installed and operating heights shall be equal.
Adjustable
spring
pack
with separate
neoprene pad
isolation.
Type 4: Spring hanger rod isolators based on Mason type HS, shall incorporate
the following:
1.
2.
E.
Reserve deflection from loaded to solid height of 50% of rated deflection.
Minimum 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside.
Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the
spring of the spring at rated load.
Non-resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure
natural frequency.
Type 3: Spring isolator based on Mason type SLR, shall be the same as Type 2,
except:
1.
D.
and short circuiting the spring.
Springs shall be pre-compressed to the rated deflection to keep piping or
equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall have
a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete.
Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the
rated deflection.
Type 2: Spring isolators based on Mason type SLF isolator, shall incorporate the
following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Spring element seated on a steel washer within a neoprene cup with a rod
isolation bushing.
Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup.
Type 5: Elastomer hanger rod isolators based on Mason type HD, shall
1.
2.
3.
4.
Molded unit type neoprene element with projecting bushing lining rod
clearance hole.
Neoprene element to be minimum 1-3/4" thick.
Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting.
Minimum static deflection of 0.35".
15100-9
F.
Type 6: Combination spring/elastomer hanger rod isolators based on Mason type
DNHS, shall incorporate the following:
1.
2.
G.
Spring and neoprene isolator elements in a steel box retainer. Neoprene of
double deflection type. Spring seated in a neoprene cup with extended rod
bushing.
Characteristics of spring and neoprene as described in Type 2 and Type 5.
Type 7: Elastomer mount isolators based on Mason type ND, shall incorporate the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Neoprene element, double deflection type.
Maximum static deflection of 0.35".
Threaded insert and hold down holes with cap screws and washer.
H.
Type 8: Pad type elastomer mountings based on Mason type Super W,
shall incorporate the following:
1.
2.
3.
I.
Type 9: Pad type elastomer mountings based on Mason type WSW, shall
1.
2.
J.
3/4" minimum thickness.
Rubber pad, ribbed or waffled design. Use neoprene in oily or exterior
locations.
50 psi maximum loading, 0.10" deflection per pad, 50 durometer.
Steel shims cemented between 5/16" thick neoprene pads layered to achieve
thickness.
Ribbed or waffled design, 40 durometer.
Type 10: Spring seismic restraint based on Mason type SSLFH, shall incorporate
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Characteristics of spring and neoprene isolator as described in Type 2.
Snubbing shall take place in all modes with adjustment to limit travel to a
maximum of 1/4" before contacting snubbers.
Mountings shall have a minimum rating of 1G as calculated by a registered
structural engineer.
All mountings shall have leveling bolts and be capable of supporting
equipment at a fixed elevation during erection.
K.
Provide pairs of neoprene side snubbers or restraining springs where side torque or
thrust may develop.
L.
Provide color code spring mounts.
M.
Select springs to operate at 2/3 maximum compression strain, with 1/4 inch ribbed
15100-10
neoprene pads.
N.
2.13
Provide side restraint and/or snubbers in all horizontal directions where required
for equipment installation.
DUCTWORK
A.
Material:
1.
B.
Ducts: Galvanized steel, lock-forming quality, having zinc coating of 1.25
ounces per square foot for each side.
2.
Fasteners: Use rivets and bolts throughout; sheet metal
screws accepted on low pressure ducts. Gasketed clamping systems may be
used provided they are rated for the pressure level of the system used on.
3.
Sealant: Water resistant, fire resistive, opaque, compatible
with mating materials.
4.
Flexible Ductwork: Not Permitted.
Fabrication:
1.
Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA duct manuals and ASHRAE
handbooks. Fittings shall conform to the configuration shown on the
Drawings.
2.
Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B.
3.
Size round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts from
ASHRAE table of equivalent rectangular and round ducts. No variation of
duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission.
4.
Complete metal ducts within themselves with no single partition between ducts. Where width of duct exceeds 18 inches cross break
for rigidity. Open corners are not acceptable.
5.
Lap metal ducts in direction of air flow. Hammer down
edges and slips to leave smooth duct interior.
6.
Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than
1-1/2 times width of duct on center line. Where not possible and where
rectangular elbows used, provide air foil type turning vanes. Where
acoustical lining is required, provide turning vanes of perforated metal type
with glass fiber inside.
7.
Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees
divergence wherever possible. Maximum total divergence upstream of
equipment to be 30 degrees and 45 degrees convergence downstream.
8.
Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight,
substantially airtight, braced and stiffened so as not to breathe, rattle,
vibrate, or sag. Calk duct joints and connections with sealant as ducts are
being assembled.
9.
Provide easements where low pressure ductwork conflicts
with piping and structure where easements exceed 10 percent duct area,
split into two ducts maintaining original duct area.
10.
Provide necessary baffling in mixed air chambers to insure
15100-11
good mixing of recirculated and outside air streams.
11.
Ensure all seams and joints are air tight. Provide gasketed
connections between joints or seal with approved duct sealing compound
equivalent to EC800. Sealant shall not be of clear, transparent type, but
shall have a distinctive color so as to be readily visible.
C.
Duct Gages:
1.
Low Pressure Ducts: Medium gages for metal. Add cross bracing, angle
stiffeners, etc. where recommended by SMACNA.
Maximum Width
In Inches
Minimum
USS Gage
Steel
Minimum
US Gage
Aluminum
Up to 12
13 to 30
31 to 54
55 to 84
85 to 120
2.
2.14
24
22
20
18
26
22
20
18
16
24
Medium Pressure Ducts: One gage heavier than for Low Pressure, or as
specified in SMACNA and ASHRAE Standards.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Access Doors
1.
B.
Fabricate rigid and close-fitting doors of galvanized steel with sealing
gaskets and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated ductwork,
install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
2.
Provide two hinges and two sash locks for sizes up to 18
inch square, two hinges and two compression latches with outside and
inside handles for sizes up to 24 x 48 inch. Provide an additional hinge for
larger sizes.
Dampers
1.
3.
Fabricate of galvanized steel, minimum 16 gage and provide with quadrants
or adjustment rod and lock screw.
2.
Fabricate splitter dampers of double thickness sheet metal to
streamline shape, properly stiffened to avoid vibration. Size on basis of
straight air volume proportioning. Use of splitter dampers is to be avoided.
Use manual volume dampers in both branches wherever possible.
Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 8 x 18 inch.
15100-12
C.
Flexible Connections
1.
D.
2.
3.
4.
3.00
3.01
Fabricate of neoprene coated flameproof fabric approximately 2 inch wide
tightly crimped into metal edging strip and attach to ducting and equipment
by screws or bolts at 6 inch intervals.
Fire Dampers
1.
PART 3
Fabricate low resistance fusible link fire dampers in accordance with
Government of the District of Columbia Basic Building Code, NFPA-90A
and UL approved procedures. Each fire damper shall possess a 1-1/2 hour
standard fire rating and shall bear the UL label attesting to this.
Fire damper shall meet all UL and NFPA requirements for primary fire
dampers, and shall be approved for use where ducts penetrate partitions
with resistance ratings of two hours or less, per UL Standard 555.
Construction: Frame shall be a 4-8/7" maximum constructed of 20 gauge
minimum galvanized steel channel. Blades shall be curtain type
constructed of 24 gauge galvanized steel. Provide a 212 F UL listed
fusible link. Provide 165 F fusible links where directed.
Damper curtain shall be located out of the air stream.
EXECUTION
GENERAL INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
B.
Offsetting/Pitching/Drains & Vents
PIPE INSTALLATION
A.
Preparation:
1.
3.
B.
Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
2.
Remove scale and dirt, inside and outside, before assembly.
Remove welding slag or foreign material from pipe and fitting materials.
Steel Pipe Connections:
1.
2.
Screw joint steel piping up to and including 2 inch. Weld piping 2-l/2 inch
and larger, including branch connections.
Die cut screwed joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with Teflon
tape or other non-toxic joint compound applied to male threads only.
15100-13
3.
5.
6.
C.
2.
3.
4.
Form hot soldered joints in copper, brass, or bronze fittings with non-lead
solder. Clean joints prior to fluxing. Use only non-acid fluxes.
2.
Make connections to equipment and branch mains with
unions.
Plastic Pipe connections.
Other pipe connections.
Vent Pipe in Air Plenum Space:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Joints for Bell and Spigot Pipe: Lead and Oakum or Neoprene gasketing
system.
Joints for Plain End Pipe: Gasket and clamp, mechanical fastener.
3.
Clamp water service pipe at fittings with 3/4 inch rods,
anchor and support.
4.
Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in
accessible locations.
5.
Make connections to equipment and branch mains with
unions.
6.
Provide non-conducting connections wherever jointing
dissimilar metals in open systems.
Copper Pipe Connections:
1.
E.
Use main sized saddle branch connections, or directly connect branch lines
to mains in steel piping if main is one pipe size larger than the branch for up
to 6 inch mains and if main is two pipe sizes larger than branch for 8 inch
and larger mains. Do not project branch pipes inside the main pipe.
Branch nozzles to be contoured to shape of main pipe, then beveled for
welding.
4.
On 250 psi and higher service, all takeoffs and branches
from mains shall be made with standard, forged steel reducing butt welding
fittings.
Small connections to main piping (up to l-l/2 inch pipe size) may be made
using weldolet, elbolet, sockolet, or thredolet fittings. Bore main full pipe
size for branch connections before attachment of welding outlet.
Joints for Plain End Pipe: Welded.
7.
Joints for Threaded End Pipe: Teflon tape or approved pipe
lubricant compound.
Cast Iron Pipe Connections:
1.
D.
All vent piping routed through an air plenum space shall be CPVC piping.
Piping shall meet all the requirements of ASTM D1784 and UL 1887.
Piping shall be Blazemaster CPVC or approved equal.
Corrugated Stainless Steel (CSST) Connections:
15100-14
The installation of CSST shall be performed only by persons who have been trained
and certified by the manufacturer of the product. A current certification card must
be presented at the time of permit issuance and each field inspection. The certified
installer shall be present at the time of each gas piping inspection where CSST is
installed. All gas piping systems which utilize CSST shall be permanently
identified by use of a metal tag, attached to the gas meter outlet, identifying the
CSST manufacturer and installing contractor.
10.
The manufacturer’’s installation instructions shall be on-site for each
inspection.
11.
The CSST shall be used in the interior of buildings, at least 6" above grade.
Installation underground or in exterior locations must be with prior
approval of the Local Authority having jurisdiction.
12.
Metal striker plates must be installed at all locations where tubing is
constrained from movement, concealed from view and/or within 3" of a
potential penetration threat.
13.
Adequate provisions for protection against physical damage, sunlight,
chemical damage, etc. must be approved prior to installation.
14.
CSST shall not extend through wall coverings into the appliance locations.
The use of appropriate listed termination fittings is required.
15.
All appliance connections shall utilize the CSST manufacturer’’s
termination fitting, an approved gas shut-off valve, and an approved
appliance connector. CSST is not to be used as an appliance connector.
16.
CSST installed in a basement or under floor crawl space shall be attached to
the sides of floor joists or girders. When required to run perpendicular to
joists, a 2x4 running board shall be provided immediately adjacent to the
CSST. The CSST shall not be attached to the running board.
17.
In attics, CSST shall be attached to the sides of joists or bottom chord of
trusses. Where required to run perpendicular to joists or trusses, 2x4
running boards on each side of the CSST shall be provided.
18.
CSST shall not be installed in:
Exterior insulated walls
Manufactured shear panels
Other such locations where the tubing movement may be restricted or
potentially damaged due to greater exposure from nailing and/or stapling.
15100-15
All manufacturers requirements or recommendations for protection of
CSST shall be followed.
3.02
3.03
HANGER INSTALLATION
A.
No chains, wood blocks, wire, or cold bent brackets may be used for support.
B.
Install hangers to provide minimum ½ inch space between finished covering and
adjacent work.
C.
Place a hanger within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.
D.
Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Provide jam nut to
lock adjustment.
E.
Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub, with 5 feet maximum
spacing between hangers.
F.
Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each
floor at hub.
G.
Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide
multiple or trapeze hangers.
H.
Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.
I.
Design hangers to be adjustable or removable without disconnecting of supported
pipe.
J.
Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.
SLEEVE/INSERT INSTALLATION
A.
Set sleeves in position in form work. Provide reinforcing around sleeves as
required.
B.
Extend sleeves through floors 2 inches above finished floor level. Calk sleeves
full depth. In dry finished areas set sleeves flush with floor, calk, and provide
approved escutcheon plate.
C.
Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling or wall, close off space between
pipe or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and sealant. Provide
close fitting chrome plated escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. Sealant
and packing shall be of a type which shall maintain the fire resistive rating of the
member being penetrated.
D.
Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.
15100-16
3.04
3.05
E.
Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
F.
Size sleeves for insulated piping and ductwork to allow insulation to pass through
sleeve undiminished in thickness. Provide intumescent fire stopping at fire rated
walls.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install gate valve at inlet and outlet of each item of equipment, whether shown on
Drawings or not.
B.
Install shutoff valves at each division or connection to main and at the base of each
riser passing through more than one floor.
C.
Install valves with stems upright to horizontal, not inverted.
D.
Install gate valves for shut-off and isolating service, to isolate equipment, parts of
systems, or vertical risers.
E.
Use plug cocks for gas service.
F.
Use plug cocks in water systems for throttling service. Use non-lubricated plug
cocks only when shut-off or isolating valves are also provided.
G.
Ball valves may be used for shut-off and throttling service in sizes 2" and smaller.
H.
Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, and low points of piping and
apparatus.
I.
Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
B.
Plastic Nameplates: Install with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or
adhesive. Drilled holes for mechanical fasteners, NO holes if adhesive is used.
C.
Metal Tags: Install with corrosive-resistant chain.
D.
Plastic Pipe Markers: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E.
Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Install completely around pipe in accordance with
15100-17
3.06
F.
Equipment: Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks,
and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices such as in-line
pumps, may be identified with metal tags.
G.
Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside of panels
with plastic nameplates.
H.
Valves: Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.
I.
Piping: Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers or plastic
tape pipe markers. Tags may be used on small diameter piping. Identify service,
flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of piping.
Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and
drops, adjacent to each valve and "T", at each side of penetration of structure or
enclosure, and at each obstruction.
J.
Provide valve chart and schedule in aluminum frame with clear plastic shield.
Chart to include valve number, service, size, and purpose of valve. Install where
directed.
K.
Submit valve charts and schedules for review prior to installation. Include copies in
Maintenance Manuals.
TESTING
A.
Test all piping and equipment as required by the various Sections of the
Specifications.
B.
Tests to be witnessed by and be to the satisfaction of the Architect or his designee,
and others having legal jurisdiction.
C.
Pressure tests shall be applied to piping before insulating and before connecting to
equipment having pressure ratings lower than the test pressure.
D.
Work shall be tested, repaired, and retested until an approved test is achieved.
E.
Damages caused by testing or failure of a test shall be repaired to the satisfaction of
the Architect, at no cost to the Owner.
F.
In general, piping systems shall be tested to 150% of the maximum expected
operating or surge pressure, or 125 psi, whichever is greater. Utility connections
shall be tested in accordance with the Utility's requirements.
G.
Completed systems shall be tested to demonstrate proper operation, capacity, and
acceptable noise and vibration levels. Insofar as possible, systems normally
operated during certain seasons of the year shall be tested during that season.
15100-18
H.
3.07
Costs for all testing shall be borne by the contractor.
SEISMIC BRACING
A.
Provide lateral bracing in all directions for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc.,
sufficient to resist the lateral forces determined under the Government of the
District of Columbia Building Code.
SMACNA standard details may be used for bracing of piping and ductwork without
calculations. NFPA 13 standard details for seismic bracing of sprinkler piping
may be used without calculations. However, other bracing schemes may be used
when submitted with calculations.
C.
A separate calculation shall be made for each equipment item.
D.
Provide bracing for all suspended or base mounted equipment, pipes, and
ductwork, except as excluded by Code.
E.
Attachments to building elements shall only be made at locations having sufficient
strength and rigidity to absorb the forces calculated.
F.
For suspended equipment provide bracing such that the effectiveness of the equipment vibration isolators is not reduced.
G.
Vibration isolators, where called for, shall have sufficient lateral stability to resist
the forces involved.
H.
Base mounted equipment attached directly to the structure, or on foundation or
housekeeping pads, shall be provided with anchor bolts having sufficient strength
in shear to absorb the calculated lateral forces in all directions.
I.
Isolated, base mounted equipment shall, in addition to verification of anchor bolt
strength, have isolation having lateral stability and snubbing capacity to absorb the
calculated lateral forces in all directions.
J.
Where not excluded by Code, provide lateral bracing for piping and ductwork.
K.
Where bracing of piping is required, normal anchors and guides provided to absorb
thermal expansion shall be considered as meeting the intent of this Section.
However, all piping 3" and larger in mechanical rooms, connected to machinery, or
forming headers for distribution, shall be braced.
L.
Where required, bracing for piping and ductwork can be made to an intermediate
hanger structure located within 12" of the top of the pipe or duct.
M.
Locate and install bracing so that access to the equipment for service, maintenance
and repair will not be impeded. Bracing shall be arranged so that there will be no
15100-19
impediment to removal or replacement of the entire unit or piece of equipment.
3.08
3.09
3.10
VIBRATION ISOLATION
A.
Install vibration isolators for motor driven equipment.
B.
Set steel bases for one inch clearance between housekeeping pad and base. Adjust
equipment level.
C.
Provide spring isolators on piping connected to isolated equipment as follows: Up
to 4 inch diameter, first three points of support; 5 to 8 inch diameter, first four
points of support; 10 inch diameter and over, first six points of support. Static
deflection of first point shall be twice deflection of isolated equipment.
FIRESTOPPING INSTALLATION
A.
Furnish all materials and labor required for installation of through penetration
firestop systems around pipe, duct, cable, conduit, and tubing openings at fire-rated
walls, floors, partitions, and floor/ceiling assemblies.
B.
Each penetration shall be reviewed by the Contractor as to it's UL designation and
construction conditions and the appropriate firestop system applied to maintain the
required rating.
DUCTWORK INSTALLATION
A.
Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and
controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems,
complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage.
Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material
inside a metal ring.
B.
Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove
accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment which may be harmed by excessive dirt with filters, or bypass
during cleaning.
C.
Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and
maintenance activities.
D.
At each point where ducts pass through walls or floors, seal joints around duct with
non-combustible material. If penetrating fire rated construction, provide sealants
to maintain the required ratings.
E.
Construct and install ductwork so as to limit leakage to a maximum of 2% of total
air quantity for ductwork.
15100-20
F.
3.11
3.12
Cap open ducts during construction to prevent entry of dirt, dust, or debris.
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans,
automatic dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication.
B.
Provide balancing dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and exhaust
systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing.
C.
Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts
associated with fans and equipment subject to forced vibration.
D.
Fire dampers shall provide a free opening the full size of the duct in which installed.
E.
Install fire dampers in accordance with regulations of NFPA, using hardware,
angles, bolts, etc., as required to maintain the intended rating.
PIPING SCHEDULE
SERVICE
SIZE
MATERIAL
Refrigerant
All
Type "L" Copper, Cleaned
and Sealed For Refrig. Service
Type "L" Copper, Wrought Fittings
40S Black steel or (CSST)***
Sch. 40 PVC
Sched.40 Steel, Thrd/Weld
CPVC Piping System conforming to
NFPA-13R.
Schedule 40, PVC
Domestic H & C Water*
All
Gas
On Plan
Waste & Storm,Vent
All
**Sprinkler Service & Dry System
All
Sprinkler System
All
Condensate Drain
All
*
**
Domestic hot and cold water piping system, shall be sanitized.
Mechanically Joined Schedule 10 Steel using grooved end pipe and compatible fittings
may be substituted for threaded or welded Steel in ACCESSIBLE locations only for fire
protection service.
***
CSST for final connection to unit limited to street.
3.13
VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE
ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
Air Furnace
Floor Mount at Grade
Condensors on Roof
ISOLATOR TYPE
9
THICKNESS
MINIMUM
½″
8
½″
3.14
VALVE SCHEDULE
15100-21
SERVICE
USED ON
Sprinkler/Standpipe
Sprinkler/Standpipe
Sprinkler/Standpipe
Sprinkler/Standpipe
Dom H.&C. Water
Dom H.&C. Water
Dom H.&C. Water
Gas
*
**
+
PIPE
SIZE
to 2"
Over 2"
3/4"to 2"
2" to 10"
All
All
All
All
END
CONNS
Threaded
Flanged
Threaded
Flanged
Solder
Solder
Solder
Threaded
TYPE
BODY
Gate
Gate
Check
Check
Gate
Globe
Check
Cock
Model Numbers Based on Nibco.
Model Numbers Based on Crane.
Model numbers based on Watts.
END OF SECTION
15100-22
JENK.
FIG#
275-U
825-C
+909
+909
*S-180
*625
1222
**1228
USE
FOR
Shutoff
Shutoff
Backfl
ow
Backflow
Shutoff
Bypass
Check
Shutoff
(Manual)
SECTION 15200
INSULATION SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.02
1.04
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This Section describes various insulation materials and accessories used for the
Project's Mechanical Systems.
B.
Refer to the Schedules at the end of this Section for the selection of insulation
systems applicable to this Project.
RELATED WORK
A.
1.03
GENERAL
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit schedule of insulating materials to be utilized.
C.
D.
Describe installation methods that will be used to install duct insulation, liners and
accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All items provided under the provisions of this Section shall be new and shall be the
products of recognized manufacturers of that item.
B.
Applicator shall be a Company specializing in insulation applications with a
minimum of three years experience.
C.
Material flame spread/fuel contributed/smoke developed rating of 25/50/50 in
accordance with NFPA 255. Insulation jacket shall be legibly printed by the
manufacturer to show nominal thickness, r-value, type insulation, flame spread and
smoke development.
15200-1
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIAL
A.
All insulation material and accessories shall be stored in a safe, dry location. No
insulation material shall be installed that has become damaged in any way.
B.
If any insulation material has become wet because of job site exposure to moisture
or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the
job site. Any installed insulation material that has become wet after installation
shall be replaced with new insulation.
C.
Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of
adhesive and insulation.
PART 2
2.00
2.01
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
The following material describes the requirements and materials for various items
included in the Project's Mechanical systems.
B.
Refer to the Schedules at the end of this Section for those items specific to this
Project.
C.
Insulation material and accessories shall be products of nationally recognized
manufacturers.
TYPE 'A' PIPE INSULATION
A.
Preformed glass fiber insulation jacketed with reinforced all service vapor retarder
jacketing; 'k' value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; operating temperature range is 0 _F to
850 _F.
B.
Insulation jacketing shall have a factory applied double pressure sensitive adhesive
lap system which provides positive closure and vapor sealing of the longitudinal
joint. Joints between insulation sections are sealed with butt strips which also
have a two component adhesive system. Jacket closure system shall provide an
effective vapor seal. Pipe insulation not employing a dual adhesive lap sealing
system must have the laps sealed down with a contact adhesive. Stapling and / or
taping will not be permitted.
C.
PVC Fitting Covers and Pipe Jacket: High-impact, ultra-violet resistant polyvinyl
chloride weatherable covering. White in color, 20 mil thick, PVC jacketing and
covers shall be an inherent vapor retarder and will be able to withstand water and
low solvency chemical wash-downs. Fittings shall be one piece, pre-molded
specifically for each fitting type, including elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers,
15200-2
end caps, hubs, traps, mechanical pipe couplings, roof drain sump, etc. Covers
and jackets shall be capable of being finished with acrylic latex paint. Product
physical properties shall be compliant with ASTM E 84, ASTM D 638, and ASTM
D 790.
2.02
2.03
2.04
TYPE 'B' PIPE INSULATION
A.
Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular thermal insulation; 'k' value of 0.27 at 75
_F; operating range of -40 _F to 220 _F.
B.
Adhesive: air-drying contact adhesive to join seams and butt joints.
C.
Insulation tape is made of the same elastomeric cellular material as the insulation.
Tape is supplied in 2 inch wide by 1/8 inch thick form.
D.
Protective finish: white water-based latex enamel suitable for both indoor and
outdoor application to insulation. Finish shall be exceptionally durable and
resistant to weather.
TYPE 'C' - HANDICAP LAVATORY & SINK INSULATION SYSTEM
A.
Molded closed cell vinyl, 3/16 inch thick, provides smooth monolithic insulated
lavatory safety insulation system conforming to A.D.A. Article 4.19.4. System
shall protect against burning and cushion impact. Provide insulated cover for
supply & waste piping, stop valve assemblies and traps.
B.
System shall be universally sized, providing full rotational design to adapt to pipe
configuration. Insulation system shall completely cover pipe surface, joints and
valves. Cover shall be removable for maintenance work on plumbing piping.
Reinstallation of system shall require no new parts. Nylon fasteners shall remain
out of sight for clean appearance. Provide with white finish. System shall be
paintable.
TYPE 'D' DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
2.05
TYPE 'E' DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
2.06
Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C 553; commercial grade 'k' value of 0.29 at 75 degrees
F; 1.0 lb/cu. ft. density; 40 _F to 250 _F temperature range. Insulation is factory
applied to reinforced foil kraft scrim (FRK) vapor retarder jacket facing.
Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C 553, 'k' value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; 6.0 lb/cu. ft.
density; 0 _F to 250 _F temperature range. Insulation is factory applied to
reinforced foil kraft scrim (FRK) jacket facing.
TYPE 'F' ACOUSTICAL DUCTWORK LINER
15200-3
A.
Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C 553; 'k' value of 0.28 at 75 degrees F; 1.5 lb/cu ft
density; 30 _F to 250 _F temperature range. Coated air side for maximum 4,000
ft/min air velocity. Ductwork shall have black pigmented coating on the airstream
side to resist damage during installation and in service. Edges shall be factory
coated with the same black pigmented coating. The duct liner shall have a mat
facing on the airstream side to resist damage during installation and in service.
15200-4
2.07
ACCESSORY MATERIAL
A.
Accessory materials installed as part of insulation work under this Section shall
include but not be limited to closure materials, insulation bands, insulating cement,
finishing cement, jacketing materials, support materials, fasteners, and adhesives.
B.
All accessory materials shall be installed in accordance with the Contract
Drawings, manufacturer's instructions and/or conformance with the current edition
of the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association (MICA) "Commercial &
Industrial Insulation Standards".
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
A.
Ensure that all surfaces over which insulation is to be applied are clean and dry.
B.
Ensure that insulation is clean, dry and in good mechanical condition with vapor or
weather barriers intact and undamaged.
C.
Ensure that testing mechanical systems have been completed prior to installing
insulation.
A.
Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B.
Continue insulation having vapor barrier through penetrations and sleeves
undiminished in thickness. Extend insulation without interruption through walls,
floors, and similar pipe penetrations, except where otherwise specified. Extend
ductwork insulation without interruption through walls and floors, except where
interrupted by fire and smoke dampers, and where noted otherwise.
C.
Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
D.
On insulated piping with vapor barrier, insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges,
strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints.
E.
On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees
F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment connections, but bevel
and seal ends of insulation at such locations.
F.
Provide an insert, not less than 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as
adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the finish jacket,
on piping 2 inches diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from sagging at point of
support. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating material suitable for
15200-5
the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used.
3.03
3.04
G.
Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Install
insulation, covers and accessories so that they have an attractive, neat appearance.
H.
All insulation ends shall be tapered and sealed, regardless of service.
I.
Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on all insulation,
protecting it against puncture, tears or other damage. All staples used on cooling
or dual temperature ductwork insulation shall be coated with suitable sealant (as
recommended by the insulation manufacturer) to maintain vapor barrier integrity.
J.
Install insulation and covering so that it has an attractive, neat appearance.
K.
Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Butt joints firmly
together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
L.
Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation
around such.
M.
When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance,
repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed
and replaced without damage.
N.
All exhaust piping within building and piping within 12 feet of grade at the building
exterior shall be insulated and jacketed. Jacketing located outdoors shall be sealed
water-tight. Exhaust piping 12 feet and higher above grade shall not be insulated.
TYPE 'A' PIPE INSULATION
A.
Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with
single cut piece to complete a run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each
other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over all piping
surfaces.
B.
Butt pipe insulation against hanger inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3" wide vapor
barrier tape and band over butt joints. For cold water piping apply wet coat of
vapor barrier lap adhesive on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier
tape.
C.
Cover valves, flanges, tees, elbows, reducers, end caps, hubs, traps, mechanical
pipe fittings and other similar items with PVC fitting covers insulated with material
equal in thickness and composition to adjoining insulation.
TYPE 'B’ PIPE INSULATION
L.
Unslit tubular form can be slipped onto piping before it is connected, or can be slit
15200-6
length wise and applied over piping already connected. Fitting covers are
fabricated from miter-cut tubular form. Butt joint and seams are to be joined with
insulation manufacturer's supplied adhesive and sealed with the manufacturer's
supplied tape. Cover valves, flanges, etc. with oversized insulation.
Provide the insulation manufacturer's protective finish on pipe insulation exposed to the
outdoors.
3.05
TYPE 'D' DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
3.06
3.07
3.08
Duct wrap insulation shall be applied with all joints butted firmly together. All
joints in the insulation covering shall be sealed with adhesive. Duct wrap
insulation shall be secured to bottom of rectangular or oval ducts over 24 inches
wide with mechanical fasteners on 16 inch centers to prevent sagging. All joints
and seams and other penetrations shall be closed with 3 inch pressure-sensitive tape
matching the facing or a vapor barrier mastic reinforced with 3 inch glass scrim
tape.
TYPE 'E' DUCTWORK INSULATION
A.
Rigid insulation shall be secured to ductwork with adhesive or impaled over
welded pins and secured with insulation caps and washers matching the color of the
vapor barrier facing. All seams, joints and other penetrations shall be firmly
butted and sealed with 3 inch pressure-sensitive vapor barrier tape matching the
facing or a vapor barrier mastic reinforced with 3 inch glass scrim tape.
B.
Corner angles shall be installed on all external corners of rigid duct insulation
before jacketing.
C.
For outdoor duct systems and duct systems exposed to a wet environment in the
building, the standard facing shall be overcoated with a suitable primer and weather
barrier mastic protective coating, reinforced with fabric or mesh, that is equivalent
to Manville Insulkote ET. Apply two (2) layers of the protective coating for a total
thickness of 1/4 inch. Taper insulation at top of duct to permit moisture runoff.
TYPE 'F' ACOUSTICAL DUCTWORK LINER
A.
Duct liner insulation shall be applied with all joints tightly butted using 90%
coverage of adhesive meeting the requirements of ASTM C 916, plus mechanical
fasteners spaced according to the liner manufacturer's schedule for the interior
width of the plenum, housing, or air shaft.
B.
Provide continuous sheetmetal edging at insulation to secure the leading edge of
duct liner.
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
15200-7
A.
All accessory materials shall be installed in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the manufacturer's printed installation instructions, and in
conformance with the current edition of the Midwest Insulation Contractors
Association (MICA) "Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards".
15200-8
3.09
PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULE
SERVICE
TYPE
Domestic Hot Water Mains
A
Domestic Hot Water Runout
B
Hot Water Recirculation Mains
A
Domestic Cold Water
A
Domestic Cold Water Runout
B
Condensate Drains
B
H'cap Lav. & Sinks Supply & Waste C
Refrigerant
B
3.10
PIPE SIZE
THICKNESS
to 2"
to 3/4"
to 2"
All
to 3/4"
All
All
All
1"
1/2"
1"
1"
1/2"
1/2"
3/8"
3/4"
DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
SYSTEM
TYPE
Supply Ducts (concealed)
Supply Ducts (exposed)
Internal Lining +
Return Ducts (concealed)
Return Ducts (exposed)
Plenums and Duct Housings
D
E
F
D
E
E
+
THICKNESS
1-1/2"
2"
1"
1-1/2"
2"
2"
FINISH
Foil Scrim
Foil Scrim
Neoprene
Foil Scrim
Foil Scrim
Foil Scrim
Ductwork with internal lining shall be also insulated with thermal insulation as
scheduled.
END OF SECTION
15200-9
SECTION 15300
SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Complete wet-pipe sprinkler system modification, including all required
accessories.
B.
Sprinklers.
C.
1.02
1.03
Fire protection specialties.
D.
System design, installation, and certification.
E.
Sprinkler system and devices signage.
F.
Hangers and supports for sprinkler installation.
G.
Sprinkler drain and test connections.
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 15010 - General Provisions - Mechanical.
B.
Section 15100 - Basic Materials and Methods.
C.
Section 16700 - Fire alarm System.
D.
All Other Sections of Division 15 and 16.
REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems, 2002 Edition.
B.
Fire Prevention Code - International Fire Code 2006 (with 2008 Supplements).
C.
"Government of the District of Columbia" (NFPA 101 Life Safety Code with Supplements).
D.
"Government of the District of Columbia" (The International Building Code 2006
15300-1
(with Supplements).
E.
1.04
1.05
NFPA 220 - Types of Building Construction.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Sprinkler system to provide complete coverage for the Entire Area of Construction
within the Building.
B.
The piping layout and head locations indicated on the Contract Drawings are
diagrammatic. The Contractor is responsible for a complete, fully coordinated
installation.
C.
Coordinate existing structural elements and building construction for adequate
coverage.
D.
Interface system components with new fire alarm system.
E.
System shall be designed to meet NFPA 13 and NFPA 24 Standards, Engineer's
requirements, Fire Marshal's requirements, and Owner's insurance underwriter.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Workmanship and Qualifications: All materials and equipment shall be installed
in accordance with NFPA Standards and all applicable local codes and ordinances.
The sprinkler subcontractor shall be state licensed to install sprinkler system. All
work and materials must conform to the requirements set forth by this
Specification. Fire protection equipment shall be installed to conform to NFPA
Standards as applicable, and devices used shall be listed and approved by
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) and/or Factory Mutual (FM). Welding shall be in
accordance with NFPA Standards by certified welders.
B.
Codes and Standards: All work shall be equal or superior to that required by
codes, regulations, ordinances, and laws imposed by the jurisdictional authorities.
Nothing in the Specifications permit violation of such directives, and where
conflict occurs, the directive shall govern, except where superior work is specified
or indicated.
C.
In addition to complying with the above codes and regulations, comply with the
requirements of the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
1.06
NFPA Standard 13.
State Building and Fire Codes.
Local Jurisdictional Authorities.
Maintain one copy of document on site and record all changes "as-built".
HYDRAULICALLY DESIGNED SYSTEM
15300-2
A.
The pipe sizing and arrangement shown on the Contract Drawings are generally
diagramatic. The Contractor shall submit for approval a hydraulically designed
system in according to the applicable requirements of NFPA-13 and the Project
Specifications.
B.
Hydraulically designed system shall include calculations and detailed layout
showing all hydraulic reference nodes. The requirements established under
section 8-1 "Working Plans" and 8-3 "Hydraulic Calculation Forms" of NFPA-13
shall be followed.
Calculations shall include a summary sheet, detailed work sheets, and water supply
graph sheets for each set of calculations.
C.
1.07
D.
The design area(s) shall be the most hydraulically demanding based on the criteria
of NFPA-13.
E.
Include loss through the reduced pressure detector assembly based on
manufacturer's publicized data.
F.
Hydraulically designed system must meet the approval of the Fire Marshal and the
Owner's insurance underwriter.
G.
All drawings and calculations must bear the seal of a professional engineer,
licensed in the Government of the District of Columbia.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit manufacturer's data, drawings, and installation instructions for all
equipment and specialties.
C.
Submit hydraulic calculations with all information required under NFPA 13.
D.
Submit installation shop drawings, including major building structural
components, detailed pipe layout, elevations, hydraulic reference points, hanger
and support locations, seismic brace locations, and components and accessories.
Show all changes in ceiling elevation, obstructions, and hydraulically most remote
area, with summary of calculation. Coordinate these shop drawings with all
building elements, including, but not limited to, mechanical system, electrical
systems, structural systems, architectural components, reflected ceilings, etc.
Provide dimensioning of critical areas.
E.
Provide layout of sprinklers for full coverage.
F.
Plans shall be 1/4" equals 1'-0" scale minimum.
G.
After successful review by Architect and Engineer, submit shop drawings to
Owner's insurance underwriter and local Fire Marshal for approval. Submit proof
15300-3
of approval to Architect/Engineer. Any deviation from approved plans must have
approval from the Fire Marshal and Architect/Engineer.
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.12
A.
Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section
15010.
B.
Include written maintenance data on components of system, servicing
requirements, and Record Drawings.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Record actual locations of sprinklers and deviations of piping from Drawings.
Indicate drain and test locations.
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Section with
minimum five years experience.
B.
Design sprinkler system under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer
experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State where the project is
located.
A.
Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation.
Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
B.
All equipment, valves, alarms, gages, etc., shall be covered and protected during
the execution of the work. All equipment and piping shall be protected from
freezing. Labeling to remain in place.
C.
All unloading, hauling, and handling of materials shall be the responsibility of the
sprinkler subcontractor.
D.
The sprinkler subcontractor can obtain information on available storage space on
site from the Owner when making examination of the site.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13.
B.
Provide suitable wrenches for each head type.
15300-4
C.
PART 2
2.01
Provide metal sprinkler storage cabinet with sprinklers in fire service room.
PRODUCTS
SPRINKLERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
Viking Corporation.
Central Sprinkler Company.
Star Sprinkler Corporation.
B.
Finished Ceiling Type: Glass bulb automatic sprinkler, adjustable, recessed
pendent type with chrome-plated sprinkler and escutcheon, 1/2" orifice size, 5.6 K
factor, 3/4" to 1-3/8" adjustable range below ceiling.
C.
Upright Type: Glass bulb automatic upright sprinkler with chrome plate finish, 1/2"
orifice size, 5.6 K factor.
D.
Sidewall Type: Sidewall glass bulb automatic sprinkler, chrome plated, 1/2" orifice
size, 5.3 K factor. Provide chrome-plated escutcheon. Provide adjustable
chrome-plated escutcheon where obstructions prevent the sprinkler from being
directly mounted on wall.
E.
Pendant Type: Glass bulb automatic pendant sprinkler with chrome plate finish,
1/2" orifice size, 5.6 K factor. Provide adjustable chrome plated escutcheon and
chrome plated sprinkler guard.
F.
Quick Response, Pendent and Upright Type: Quick response sprinkler, 1/2" orifice,
5.6 k factor; sprinkler and escutcheon shall be chrome plated.
G.
Extended Coverage Fast Response Sidewall Type: Extended coverage (16'x18')
horizontal sidewall automatic sprinkler, 1/2" orifice, 5.6 K factor. Sprinkler and
escutcheon shall be chrome plated.
H.
Spare Sprinklers: Furnish spare automatic sprinklers in accordance with the
requirements of NFPA Standard 13 for stock of extra sprinklers. The sprinklers
shall be packed in a suitable container and shall be representative of, and in proportion to, the number of each type and temperature rating of the sprinklers installed.
Furnish no less then two special sprinkler head wrenches, or at least one head
wrench for each container or sprinkler box, whichever is greater.
I.
Guards: Finish to match sprinkler head.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PREPARATION
15300-5
3.02
3.03
A.
Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work.
B.
The subcontractor shall perform a flow test to confirm design data obtained with
the Local Water Company as follows: ## psi static; ## psi residual at ### GPM.
Existing flow data to not exceed one year to date.
C.
Subcontractor shall field verify prior to the installation of the sprinkler system the
location of exposed structure and other building elements. Furnish and install the
appropriate sprinkler head type and spacing per NFPA for this application.
INSTALLATION - PIPING
A.
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
B.
Products shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of this Specification
and all applicable NFPA Standards.
C.
Impairments to the existing water supplies shall be minimized. All work shall be
complete before making the final connections to the existing water supplies.
Notify the Owner's representative before impairing any fire protection equipment.
D.
Maintain a clean and orderly site during the installation of the sprinkler system.
Materials shall not be stored in the halls or other public areas.
E.
Cutting, welding and other hot work shall not be permitted without permission
from the building owner.
F.
Place pipe runs to minimize obstruction to other work.
G.
Apply strippable tape or paper cover to ensure concealed sprinkler head cover
plates do not receive field paint finish.
H.
All sprinkler piping shall be installed concealed above ceilings and within walls
unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
I.
Hydrostatically test entire system.
J.
Require test to be witnessed by the Fire Marshal.
K.
Keep sprinkler system downtime to a minimum.
L.
Provide access panels for all valves and flow switches.
INSTALLATION - SPRINKLERS
A.
Provide sprinkler coverage for the Entire Area of Construction.
15300-6
B.
3.04
3.05
A.
Provide extra sprinkler heads under provisions of NFPA 13.
sprinkler heads in proportion to the type of heads installed.
B.
Provide suitable wrenches for each head type.
C.
Provide sprinkler head cabinets to store the extra supply of heads and wrenches in
locations designated.
Provide extra
CLEANING
Flush entire piping system of foreign matter.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.07
Provide sprinkler layout for review by Architect/Engineer
EXTRA STOCK
A.
3.06
Provide and apply signs to control, drain, test and alarm valves to identify their
purpose and function. Provide and permanently attach hydraulic calculations
data nameplate at the controlling valve for the sprinkler system. Provide lettering
size and style from NFPA's suggested styles.
TESTING
A.
Piping; The completed system shall be subject to a pressure test, and to such
other tests as the authorities having jurisdiction may require. The pressure test
shall be a hydrostatic pressure of (200) pounds per square inch for a period of two
hours. The above ground piping and attached appurtenances shall show no
pressure loss or leaks, refer to NFPA Standard 13 Hydrostatic Tests. Before
applying specific test pressure, all air must be expelled from the system. All
defects of whatever type shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the
Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Packing rings, special joint bolts,
gaskets, and other material required for the proper installation of the pipe and
fittings shall be provided. Testing shall be completed prior to permanent sealing
of walls and partition.
B.
Leaks in mechanical joints shall be repaired by dismantling the joint, reassembling
it, and tightening the bolts in the correct order. Leaks in screw or grooved joint
shall be repaired by dismantling the joint and reassembling it. Attempting to
repair leaks in joints by over tightening the bolts or fittings shall not be permitted.
C.
Upon satisfactory completion of all tests, submit three copies of the Standard
Contractors Material and Test Certificate to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
15300-7
SECTION 15400
PLUMBING SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.02
1.03
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Complete, operational, plumbing systems, including, but not limited to, waste and
vent piping, hot and cold water, gas piping, fixtures, trim, supports, accessories,
etc., as required.
B.
Plumbing Specialties.
C.
Plumbing Fixtures.
D.
Plumbing Equipment.
E.
Plumbing System Disinfection.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
Section 15200 - Insulation Systems.
C.
Toilet and Bath Accessories by other Divisions of this Specification.
D.
Cabinet Tops prepared for sinks by other Divisions of this Specification.
REFERENCES
A.
D.C. Plumbing Code - International Plumbing Code 2006.
B.
ANSI/ASME A112.6.1 - Supports for Off-The-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public
Use.
C.
ANSI A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
D.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
E.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
15400-1
1.04
1.05
F.
ANSI/ASME A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.
G.
ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
H.
ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arresters.
I.
ANSI, A117.1-1998 For Buildings and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and
Usability for Physically Handicapped People.
J.
ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.
K.
ANSI/ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent.
L.
ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.
M.
ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining
Anti-Backflow Types.
N.
UFAS, FED-STD-795 - Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards.
O.
AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and
Double Check Valve Types.
P.
PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arrestors.
Q.
ANSI/NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
R.
ANSI/NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
S.
ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
T.
ANSI A112.21.2 - Roof Drains.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All items provided under this Section shall be new, of domestic manufacturer, and
shall be the products of recognized manufacturers of that item.
B.
all plumbing fixtures, all accessory items, etc. shall be from the same source.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Include fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.
15400-2
C.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
15400-3
1.06
1.07
1.08
DEFINITIONS
A.
Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience or improved appearance
to a fixture but is not essential to its operation.
B.
Equipment: Device used with plumbing fixtures or plumbing systems to perform
a certain function for plumbing fixtures but that is not part of the fixture.
C.
Fixture: Installed receptor connected to the water distribution system, that
received and makes available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid
borne wastes directly or indirectly into the drainage system.
D.
Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and
securing plumbing fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for urinals,
lavatories, and sinks are made in types suitable for fixture construction and the
mounting required.
E.
Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally
supplied with it required to complete fixture assembly and installation.
A.
Submit Operation and Maintenance Data under provisions of Section 15010.
B.
Include fixture trim exploded view and replacement parts lists.
WARRANTY
A.
1.09
1.10
Fixtures and Trim: Five years.
A.
Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage.
B.
Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory
packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use.
FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
Confirm that millwork is constructed with adequate provisions for the installation
of counter top lavatories and sinks.
15400-4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
2.02
GENERAL
A.
included in the Project's Plumbing Systems.
B.
Refer to the Plumbing Drawings.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
A.
1.
2
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
FLOOR DRAINS
1.
C.
J. R. Smith.
Mifab
Zurn.
Watts.
Febco.
Symmons.
Woodford.
Substitutes shall be approved by the Engineer.
Floor Drain FD: ANSI A112.21.1; cast iron body with drainage flange,
weep holes, sediment bucket and round adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.
Floor drain shall be Model #2005-B as manufactured by J.R.Smith.
CLEANOUTS
1.
Interior Finished Floor Areas: Cast iron body with square adjustable
scoriated secured nickel-bronze top, and vandal proof screws. Cleanout
shall be model #4040 as manufactured by J.R.Smith, or approved equal.
2.
Interior Finished Wall Areas: Line type with lacquered cast iron body and
epoxy coated gasketed cover and round stainless steel access cover secured
with machine screw. Cleanout shall be Model #4422 as manufactured by
J.R.Smith, or approved equal.
3.
Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas: Caulked or threaded type. Provide
bolted stack cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.or approved equal.
4.
Floor Grade Cleanout (F.G.C.O.): Duco cast iron heavy duty secured with
scoriated cast iron cover. Cover shall be provided with lifting device and
vandal proof screws. F.G.C.O. shall be model series #4250 or 4260 (as
15400-5
required) as manufactured by J.R. Smith or approved equal.
D.
H.B.I
1.
E.
HYDRANTS (Type H.B.E.)
1.
F.
ANSI A112.26.1; sized in accordance with PDI, precharged, suitable for
operation in temperature range -100 to 300 degrees F (-73 to 149 degrees C)
and maximum 250 psig working pressure. Water hammer arrestor shall be
Hydrotrol series 5000 as manufacturered by J.R. Smith, or approved equal.
THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE
1.
I.
Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ANSI/ASSE 1013 (AWWA
C506); bronze body, two independently operating, spring loaded check
valves. Diaphragm type differential pressure relief valve located between
check valves; assembled with two gate valves, strainer, and test cocks.
Backflow preventer shall be Model #009QT as manufactured by Watts, or
approved equal.
WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
1.
H.
Wall Hydrant: ANSI/ASSE 1019; non-freeze, self-draining type with
chrome plated hose thread spout, lock shield and removable key, and
integral vacuum breaker. Hydrant shall be Model #25C as manufactured
by Woodford, or approved equal.
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
1.
G.
“Woodford” Model #21CP automatic draining, anti-siphon vacuum breaker
wall faucet.
Provide thermostatic mixing valve, capacity 15 gallon per minute at 45 psi
differential, with check valve, volume control shut-off on outlet, stem type
thermometer on outlet, strainer stop check on inlet. Manufacturer to
provide ASSE 1017-86 compliance stamped on valve body.
AIR GAP FITTINGS
1.
Full drain line size, J.R. Smith Series 3950 or approved equal.
2.
Inlet connection non-threaded, having set screw to position inlet pipe within
air gap.
3.
Cut inlet pipe at 45 degree angle.
15400-6
4.
2.03
2.04
Maintain Code required air gap when installing.
PLUMBING FIXTURES & TRIM
A.
1.
American Standard.
2.
Crane.
3.
Kohler.
4.
Elkay.
5.
Fiat.
6.
Symmons.
7.
Delta
8.
Halsey Taylor.
9.
Zurn.
10.
Substitutes shall be approved by the Engineer.
B.
SEE FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS PFLC 1.1.
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
A.O. Smith
Lochinvar
P.V.I.
State.
Powers.
Watts.
Amtrol.
Substitutions shall be approved by the Engineer.
SEE FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON DRAWINGS P-2.
2.
Local Thermostatic Mixing Valve.
a.
b.
c.
2.
Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Self-contained. Temp. setting to
produce the required temp at the furthest fixture.
Temperature Range: 85 degrees F. to 120 degrees F.
Thermostatic mixing valve shall be Model #5-225 as manufactured
by Simmons or approved equal.
Expansion Tank:
Tank: Factory precharged type, with an internal sealed butyl rubber
diaphragm, welded steel, constructed in accordance with ASME
requirements, rated for working pressure of 80 psi, cleaned, prime
coated and supplied with steel mounting brackets for floor
15400-7
b.
c.
d.
mounting. Construct tank with tappings for installation of
accessories.
Provide quick connect air inlet of automotive tire valve type and
tank drain.
Provide pressure relief valve and automatic cold water fill assembly
complete with pressure reducing valve, reduced pressure double
check back pressure valve with test cocks, strainer, vacuum breaker,
and valved bypass.
Expansion tank shall be Model #ST-5 as manufactured by
Therm-X-Trol or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
3.02
3.03
INSPECTION
A.
Review cabinet work shop drawings. Confirm location and size of cut-out for sink
before rough-in.
B.
Verify that adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this Section.
PLUMBING SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intended
performance.
B.
Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Coordinate with quarry tile
floor pattern. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and
linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.
C.
Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.
D.
Install backflow preventer in an accessible location, a maximum of 5 feet above
finished floor.
E.
Install water hammer arresters complete on all supply piping to fixtures with a flush
valve.
F.
Install water hammer arrestors complete with an accessible isolation valve.
PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A.
Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for cleaning and service.
B.
Provide chrome plated flexible supplies to fixtures with screwdriver stops,
reducers, and escutcheons.
C.
Install components level and plumb.
15400-8
3.04
3.05
D.
Install and secure fixtures in place with carrier supports.
E.
Seal fixtures to walls and floors with sealant, color to match fixture, type as
approved by Architect.
F.
Maintain fixture heights above finished floor in accordance with codes and with
architectural details.
G.
All faucets that can be used with a hose shall have anti-siphon devices bearing seal
of ASSE.
H.
Maintain ratings of new and existing walls. Provide sleeves and fire sealants as
required.
PUMP INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B.
Provide air cock and drain connection on casing.
C.
Provide line sized isolating valves and strainer on suction and line sized soft seated
check valve and balancing valve on discharge.
D.
Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support
piping adjacent to pump so that no weight is carried on pump casing.
E.
Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding
and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate
within 25 percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.
DISINFECTION SEQUENCE - POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
A.
The pipe system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until dirty water does not
appear at the points of outlet.
B.
The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water/chlorine solution containing
at least 50 parts per million of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be
valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours; or the system or part thereof shall be
filled with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of
chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours.
C.
Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean potable
water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.
D.
The procedure shall be repeated if it is shown by a bacteriological examination by
the authority that contamination is still present in the system.
15400-9
END OF SECTION
15400-10
SECTION 15500
HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.
This Section describes equipment for use in the Project's Mechanical Systems.
Items are described which may or may not be included in this Project.
B.
Refer to the Equipment Schedules on the Drawings.
C.
Work included under this Section shall include, but not be limited to exhaust fans,
air terminals, and refrigerant specialties.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
Refer also to any applicable portions of Division 16, Electrical Work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit Manufacturer's Installation Instructions under provisions of Section 15010.
Include Manufacturer's wiring and piping diagrams prepared for this project.
C.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
All items provided under the provisions of this Section shall be new and shall be the
products of recognized manufacturers of that item.
B.
all accessory items, etc. shall be from the same source.
C.
Fans shall conform to AMCA Bulletins regarding construction and testing. Fans
shall bear AMCA certified rating seal.
15500-1
1.05
A.
1.06
1.07
A.
Protect equipment from physical damage by storing in protected areas and leaving
factory covers in place.
B.
Do not operate fans for any purpose, temporary or permanent, until ductwork is
clean, filters in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has been run under observation.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
PART 2
2.01
2.02
Comply with applicable regulations.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
2.00
Sequence and schedule work to match the finishing schedule for the project.
PRODUCTS
GENERAL
A.
included in the Project's Mechanical systems.
B.
Refer to the Schedules on the Drawings for those items specific to this Project
AIR TERMINALS
A.
Drawings based on products manufactured by Buckley. Terminals manufactured
by MetAlaire, Nailer and Anemostat will be considered.
B.
Diffusers and registers shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard
70-1991. Base terminal application on space noise criteria (NC) of 30 maximum.
C.
Terminal finish shall be #26 white, except where noted to be selected by the
Architect. The finish shall be an anodic acrylic paint, baked at 315 F for 30
minutes. The pencil hardness shall be HB to H. The paint shall also pass the
ASTM D-2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a 50 inch pound force applied.
The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM-870 water immersion.
CEILING EXHAUST FANS
C.
Provide multi-blade, forward curved wheel in steel housing for ceiling mounting.
Resiliently mount direct driven fan and motor.
permanently lubricated bearings.
15500-2
Motor shall be plug-in type with
2.03
D.
Heavy gauge steel housing shall be lined with ½" thick acoustic insulation.
E.
Provide accessory items according to fan schedule or as on drawings.
F.
Exhaust fans shall have automatic back draft dampers. Provide frosted light lens
and integral fluorescent light fixture with lamps.
G.
Provide ceiling grille for ceiling exhaust fans.
REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES
A.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Sporlan Valve Company
2.
Alco Valve Company
3.
Henry Valve Company
B.
Specialties provided by equipment manufacturer as a part of packaged equipment
shall be used. Additional items needed shall comply with the following specification.
C.
Liquid Indicators:
D.
1.
Provide combination liquid and moisture indicator.
2.
Double port type with copper or brass body, and flared or solder ends.
3.
Provide removable seal caps on each port for inspection of refrigerant
condition.
4.
Provide full size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser. If
receiver is used, install in liquid line leaving receiver.
Strainers:
1.
Angle type with brass shell and replaceable cartridge.
2.
Suitable for refrigerant and piping material utilized in the system.
3.
Provide full size strainer ahead of each expansion or solenoid valve.
Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used install
single main liquid line strainer.
4.
On steel piping systems provide strainer in suction line to remove scale and
rust.
15500-3
5.
E.
F.
G.
H.
Provide shut-off valve on each side of strainer to facilitate maintenance.
Refrigerant Driers:
1.
In-line or angle type with copper or brass shell.
2.
Employ replaceable desiccant drier material.
3.
Provide full flow permanent refrigerant drier in low temperature systems
and systems utilizing hermetic compressors.
4.
Provide three-valve bypass assembly.
Filter-Driers:
1.
Angle type, with brass shell and using combined straining and drying
material.
2.
Employ replaceable desiccant material.
3.
Acceptable in lieu of separate strainers and driers.
4.
Provide three-valve bypass assembly.
Solenoid Valves:
1.
Copper or brass body with flared or soldered ends.
2.
Use replaceable coil assembly.
3.
Provide a manually operated stem to permit operation in case of coil failure
on valves over 3/4 inch line size.
4.
Provide solenoid valves in liquid line of system operating with single
pump-out or pump-down compressor control, in each liquid circuit of
evaporator systems, and in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to
stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the suction line when system shuts
down.
Expansion Valves:
1.
Angle type or straight through design suitable for the refrigerant utilized in
the system.
2.
Brass body, internal or external equalizer, and adjustable superheat setting,
complete with capillary tube and remote sensing bulb. Flared, solder or
flanged connections.
15500-4
I.
J.
K.
2.03
3.
Size expansion valves to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively
oversized at partial load.
4.
Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine the
available pressure drop across each valve.
5.
Select valves for maximum load at design operating differential pressure
and minimum of 12 degrees F of Superheat.
Charging Valves:
1.
General purpose type with brass body, flared or solder ends, cap and chain.
2.
Provide valve inlet with quick SAE thread for standard manifold hose.
3.
Provide refrigerant charging connections in liquid line between receiver
shut-off valve and drier.
Flexible Connectors:
1.
Close pitch corrugated bronze hose with single layer of exterior braiding.
2.
At least 9 inches long with bronze fittings.
3.
Utilize only at or near compressors where it is not physically possible to
absorb vibration within piping configuration.
Refrigerant Hand Valves:
1.
7/8 inch O.D. line size and smaller:
connections.
Packless type, solder or flare
2.
1-1/8 inch O.D. line size and larger: Packed stem with adjustable packing
nut and seal cap. Sizes 3-1/8 inch O.D. and larger, provide wing handle
seal cap; solder connections.
ROOF EXHAUST FANS
A.
Drawings based on products manufactured by Greenheck. Products manufactured
by Penn, and Cook will be considered.
B.
Hood construction shall be of arched heavy gauge aluminum sheets with roll
formed interlocking seams for reinforcement. Hoods shall have galvanized steel
supports and shall be hinged for service access. Provide manufacturer’s baked
enamel finish in custom color as selected by the Architect.
15500-5
A.
Belt Drive Fans: The fan and inlet cone shall be aluminum and of the high
performance, centrifugal blower type. Wheels shall overlap the spun venturi for
maximum performance. Wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced to
assure smooth and vibration-free operation.
B.
Direct Drive Fans: The fan wheel, inlet cone and curb cap shall be of aluminum
construction. The wheel shall be the backward curved non-overloading
centrifugal type dynamically and statically balanced.
C.
Motors shall be of the heavy duty type with permanently lubricated, sealed ball
bearings. The wheel shaft shall be ground and polished steel and shall be mounted
in heavy duty, permanently sealed pillow block ball bearings. Drives shall be
sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower. Pulleys shall be of the fully
machined cast iron typ, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts.
The motor pulley shall be adjustable for final system balancing. The entire drive
assembly shall be mounted on vibration isolators. Direct drive motors shall be
heavy duty type. Motors and centrifugal wheels shall be mounted on vibration
isolators.
D.
All fans shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for both sound and air
performance.
E.
Provide fan manufacturer’s minimum 12" high insulated roof curb with cant.
Curb shall be 18 gauge galvanized steel of welded construction. Curb color shall
match fan finish. Kitchen exhaust fan discharge shall be a minimum of 40" above
the roof.
PART 3
3.00
EXECUTION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
B.
3.01
3.02
Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as
instructed by the manufacturer.
B.
Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
C.
CLEANING
15500-6
3.03
A.
After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of
units.
B.
Touch-up marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets and covers,
using finish materials furnished by manufacturer.
AIR TERMINALS
A.
3.04
3.05
Paint ductwork visible behind air terminals matte black.
CEILING EXHAUST FANS
A.
Complete structural, mechanical, and electrical connections in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
B.
Coordinate the installation of unit controls with Section 15900 - Control Systems.
C.
Rigging of units, setting and flashing of curbs shall be the responsibility of the
contractor. Curbs shall be set and shimmed level.
D.
E.
Curbs shall be installed in accordance to National Roofing standards.
Perform all measures necessary to protect the Owner's property and to secure the
work area.
REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES
A.
B.
C.
Refrigerant Driers:
1.
Mount drier vertically in liquid line adjacent to receiver with bypass
assembly to permit isolation of drier for servicing.
2.
In replacement core driers, mount with access cover pointing downward.
Filter-Driers:
1.
Install with bypass assembly to permit isolation for servicing.
2.
Install with removable access cover facing downward.
Expansion Valves:
1.
Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately after evaporator outlet on
suction line.
2.
Remove power element and cage assembly when soldering expansion valve
into line.
15500-7
D.
3.
Connect external equalizer line to evaporator suction outlet at top of
horizontal or side of vertical suction pipe.
4.
Securely clamp bulb to suction line using two mechanical clamps. Locate
bulb at 7 o'clock on horizontal suction pipe.
5.
Insulate suction line and bulb.
Flexible Connectors:
1.
E.
Install so that there is no strain placed on adjacent equipment.
Refrigerant Hand Valve:
1.
F.
Install solder end valves with valves fully open while applying heat.
Refrigerant Piping:
1.
Install according to requirements of equipment manufacturer, but provide
NO LESS than the following procedures.
2.
Braze all joints using medium temperature brazing alloy, "Silfos" or
equivalent, using an appropriate flux.
All tubing to be factory cleaned and capped for refrigeration use. All fittings
to be long sweep, wrought copper type.
3.
4.
Perform all brazing operations while flowing an inert gas (anhydrous
nitrogen) through the joint being brazed.
5.
Pressure test completed piping to 400 psig on high side and to 200 psig on
low side. Isolate or remove control elements or system components not
rated to withstand these pressures. Pressurize piping by raising pressure to
50 psig using new, clean refrigerant, then raise level to test pressure using
anhydrous nitrogen. Check each and every joint for tightness using an
electronic halide leak detector set at maximum sensitivity. Repair any leaks
found, repressurize and re-test until tight.
6.
Remove test pressure and evacuate system to 500 microns or lower. Use
minimum of ½ HP vacuum pump and 3/4" connection to system. After
reaching 500 micron level, continue to pump for four (4) hours to evacuate
residual moisture. Isolate system and remove pump. If system vacuum rises
above 400 microns after four (4) hours, reconnect pump and re-evacuate to
500 microns holding for four (4) hours. If system vacuum remains below
400 microns after four (4) hours with vacuum pump disconnected, it may be
charged.
7.
Remove pump, break vacuum with new, dry Refrigerant 22 gas and permit
15500-8
system to achieve equilibrium (probably 50 to 70 psig). Complete charging
to operating level in accordance with equipment manufacturer's
recommendations.
8.
3.06
If outdoor temperatures are below 60F, it may be necessary to apply heat to
the air cooled condenser coils to insure boil-off of residual moisture. This
may be done using heat lamps, taking care to avoid overheating of coils.
EXHAUST FANS
A.
B.
Coordinate the installation of unit controls with Section 15900 - Control Systems.
C.
Rigging of units, setting and flashing of curbs shall be the responsibility of the
contractor. Curbs shall be set and shimmed level.
D.
Curbs shall be installed in accordance to National Roofing standards.
E.
Perform all measures necessary to protect the Owner's property and to secure the
work area.
END OF SECTION
15500-9
SECTION 15623
FORCED AIR FURNACES WITH A/C
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.02
1.03
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Dirtect Vent Horizontal Gas Fired Air Furnaces.
B.
Refrigerant Cooling Coil and Drain Pan.
C.
Vent Piping and Terminations.
D.
Controls.
RELATED WORK
A.
15671 - Air Cooled Condensing Units.
B.
All Sections of Division 15.
REFERENCES
A.
1.04
1.05
ARI 210 - Standard for Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of UL and applicable codes.
B.
Cooling system tested and rated to Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
standard 210.
C.
CSA International Certification.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 15010 showing
dimensions, connections, arrangement, accessories, and controls.
B.
15623-1
1.06
A.
1.07
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and
maintenance and repair data under provisions of Section 15010.
WARRANTY
A.
Provide twenty (20) year warranty on heat exchanger. All other components shall
have a five (5) year warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.00
2.01
2.02
2.03
A.
Lennox.
B.
Trane.
C.
York.
TYPE
A.
Provide high efficiency upflow furnace type with natural gas burner and electric
refrigeration coil.
B.
Provide self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired unit consisting of
cabinet, supply fan, heat exchanger, heater, controls, air filter and refrigerant
cooling coil with drain pan.
FABRICATION
A.
Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured
access doors, glass fiber insulation and reflective liner.
B.
Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel welded construction.
C.
Combustion Chamber: Welded stainless steel.
D.
Supply Fan: Centrifugal type, rubber mounted with direct or belt drive,
(adjustable variable pitch motor pulley), rubber isolated hinge mounted 1750
rev/min (two speed) motor.
E.
Air Filters: One inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy
replacement.
BURNER
15623-2
A.
2.04
2.05
A.
Provide low voltage, adjustable room thermostats, to control burner operation to
maintain room temperature settings.
B.
Solid-state board contains all necesasry controls and relay to operate furnace.
Combustion air inducer is controlled by board. Prior to ignition, a pre-purge cycle
for 15 seconds is initiated. After the main burners are turned off, a post-purge
cycle for 5 seconds is run.
C.
Adaptive technology of ignition control board continuously monitors and adjust the
ignitor voltage to operate at minimum igniter temperature required for ignition,
prolonging ingitor life. Electronic flame sensor control assures safe and reliable
operation.
D.
Watchguard type circuit automatically resetsignition controls after one hour of
continuous thermostat demand after unit lockout, eliminating nuisance call.
E.
Fan contorl consist of adjustable blower timed-off delay (60 to 180 seconds) and
fixed blower timed delay (45 seconds). For air conditioning blower is
automatically energized on thermostat demand for cooling.
F.
Provide controls for supply fan in accordance with bonnet temperatures
independent of burner controls. Include manual switch for continuous fan
operation.
AUTOMATIC GAS CONTROL
100% safety shut off. 24 volt redundant combination gas control valve. Provide
manual shutoff option and gas pressure regulator. Gas valve automatically
regulated to maintain even gas flow regardless of venting installation.
COMBUSTION AIR INDUCER
A.
2.07
Aluminized steel inshot burner. Burner shall be completely enclosed. Provide
heavy gauge steel burner box.
BURNER OPERATING CONTROLS
F.
2.06
Combustion air inducer prepurges heat exchanger and safely vents combuation
products. Inducer operates only during heat demand cycle. Provide pressure
switch to prevent unit operation in case of blockage of cumbustion air inlet, flue
outlet or condensate drain.
LIMIT CONTROLS
A.
Automatic reset, primary and secondary limits are accurately located. Primary
limit factory installed on vestibule panel, secondary limit factory installed on
15623-3
blower housing.
2.08
FLAME ROLLOUT SWITCH
A.
2.09
2.10
Manual reset, factory installed on top of burner box.
EVAPORATOR COIL
A.
Mount in furnace supply plenum copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly, with
galvanized drain pan, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections.
B.
Provide factory installed thermostatic expansion valve.
ACCESSORIES
Provide the following manufacturer supplied accessories:
Filter kit.
Vertical support frame kit.
Wall termination kit - concentric vent.
Closed couple and wall ring kits.
Heating/cooling thermostat with 7 day time clock feature for occupied/unoccupied
cycle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.00
INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with the unit manufacturers printed installation instructions.
END OF SECTION
15623-4
SECTION 15671
AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
All applicable provision of the General Conditions and the Supplementary General
Conditions shall apply to all work of this Section.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Condensing unit package.
B.
Controls.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
Section 15623 - Forced Air Furnaces with A/C.
C.
All other Sections of Division 15.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Conform to requirements of UL and applicable codes.
B.
Test and rate cooling system to ARI Standard 210.
A.
Qualifications: Equipment manufacturer must specialize in the manufacture of the
products specified and have five (5) years experience with the equipment and
refrigerant offered.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Submit with shop drawings, schematic layouts showing condensing units, cooling
coils, refrigerant piping, and accessories required for complete system.
C.
Submit complete pipe sizing data.
D.
A.
Schematic diagram of control system indicating points for field connection.
15671-1
Diagram shall fully delineate field and factory wiring.
B.
1.05
1.06
DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A.
Condensing units shall be delivered to the job site with the factory holding charge
intact and a factory charge of oil.
B.
Comply with the manufacturer’s instructions for rigging and handling equipment.
WARRANTY
A.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
Single line schematic drawing of the power field hookup requirements, indicating
all items which are furnished.
The refrigeration equipment manufacturer’s guarantee shall be for a period of one
year from date of equipment start up. The guarantee shall include parts and
workmanship that have proven defective within the above period., excluding
refrigerant. Compressors have (5) five year warranty.
PRODUCTS
A.
Lennox.
B.
Tranel.
C.
York.
CONDENSING UNITS
A.
Provide self-contained packaged, factory assembled and pre-wired units suitable
for outdoor use consisting of cabinet, compressors, condensing coil and fans,
integral sub-cooling coil, controls, liquid receiver, and screens.
B.
Provide air cooled condensing units, as scheduled on Drawings.
MATERIALS
A.
Use corrosion resistant materials for parts in contact with refrigerant.
B.
Provide timer circuits to prevent rapid loading and unloading of compressor.
CABINET
A.
Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, and removable access doors or panels
with quick fasteners.
15671-2
15671-3
2.05
COMPRESSOR
A.
Hermetic reciprocating type with discharge service valve, crankcase oil heater and
suction strainer. Compressor shall have a forced feed lubrication system with a
reversible oil pump and initial oil charge.
Motor shall be refrigerant gas cooled, high torque, hermetic induction type, four-pole, with
inherent thermal protection on all three phases and shall be mounted on vibration
isolator pads.
2.06
2.07
CONDENSER
A.
Coil: Seamless copper tubing with aluminum fins.
B.
Fans: Vertical discharge, direct drive axial fans, resiliently mounted with guard
and motor.
C.
Motors: Permanently lubricated ball bearing motors with built-in current and
overload protection.
CONTROLS
A.
Control panel shall contain the field power connection points, control interlock
terminals, and terminals to connect contractor furnished and field installed
thermostat. Hinged access doors shall be lockable. Deadfront panels are required to
protect against accidental contact with line voltage when accessing the control
system.
B.
Power and starting components shall include factory fusing of fan motors and
control circuit; individual contactors for each fan motor, solid-state start timer,
solid-state compressor three-phase motor overload protection, inherent fan motor
overload protection and unit power terminal blocks for connection to remote fused
disconnect switch.
Provide recycling pumpdown control, high and low pressure safety switches, water
temperature controller, freeze protection pressurestats, and fan cycling controls.
2.08
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES
A.
The following options are to be included:
1.
PART 3
3.01
Control circuit transformer.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
15671-4
3.02
A.
B.
Furnish charge of refrigerant and oil.
C.
Coordinate controls with control contractor and electrical installation with
electrical contractor.
ADJUSTING
A.
Supply initial charge of refrigerant and oil for each refrigeration system. Replace
losses of oil or refrigerant prior to end of correction period. Supply to Owner, one
complete charge of lubricating oil in addition to that placed in the system.
B.
Complete refrigerant piping, testing, dehydration and charging in accordance with
the requirements of Section 15100.
C.
Shut down system if initial start-up and testing takes place in winter and machines
are to remain inoperative. Repeat start-up and testing operation at beginning of
first cooling season.
D.
Provide cooling season start-up, and winter season shutdown for first year of
operation.
END OF SECTION
15671-5
SECTION 15990
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Air Systems.
B.
Owner Instructions.
C.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
D.
"As Built" Drawings.
REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A.
Provide testing, balancing and adjusting (TBA) services for all operating
mechanical systems.
B.
Provide report covering results of TBA procedures.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
B.
Section 15500 - HVAC Equipment.
C.
Section 15623 - Forced Air Furnace with A/C
D.
All other Sections in Division 15.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Work to be performed by testing agency having at least 3 years experience in TBA
procedures for equivalent projects.
B.
Air System TBA by personnel certified by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).
C.
Instrumentation used to have documented calibration.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals and "As-Built Drawings" shall be reviewed
by the Engineer prior to turning over to Owner. Refer to Section 15010 - General
Provisions-Mechanical.
15990-1
1.05
1.06
PROCEDURES
A.
Comply with procedural standards of AABC.
B.
Two weeks prior to start of TBA procedures submit for approval the following:
Copies of written procedures to be used, forms to be used, instrument calibration
documents, qualifications of testing personnel and a schedule of hydronic terminal
units water flow rates.
C.
Cooperate with installing subcontractor.
D.
Submit final report within one week of completion of TBA procedures.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A.
Prepare system for testing, balancing and adjusting (TBA).
B.
Cooperate with Testing organization to provide access to equipment. Operate
system at required times and under conditions required for effective TBA.
C.
Prior to start of TBA work, make sure air systems have all dampers open.
D.
Ensure that all systems have been cleaned and filters serviced and otherwise
ready for TBA.
E.
Provide manufacturer's testing and start-up report for each energy recovery unit
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
None required.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS AIR BALANCING
A.
Test, Balance and Adjust all systems having fans, ducts and air terminals.
B.
Minimum Data and Services required:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Confirm that all air filters are clean.
Test and record motor amperage (all phases).
Make pilot tube traverse of each main supply duct and obtain CFM
delivered by fans.
Test and record static pressures, suction and discharge.
Adjust system for design CFM of recirculated air.
Test and adjust system for design CFM of outside air.
7.
Test and record entering and leaving temperatures for each
heating/cooling unit, recording dry and wet bulbs.
8.
Adjust all main and branch ducts to design air quantity.
9.
Test and adjust each and every supply, return and exhaust
15990-2
10.
11.
13.
3.02
terminal to within 5% of design quantity.
Identify each air terminal as to size/type and location and reference
manufacturer's procedure for determination of CFM.
Record initial readings and CFM and finally adjusted CFM for each air
terminal.
12.
In cooperation with Automatic Control System representative, set and adjust automatic dampers and louvers to operate as
specified and to proper CFM.
Adjust each air terminal for proper throw and pattern to achieve intended
coverage and to minimize drafts.
C.
Make any needed changes to motors, pulleys, drives or belts, add any needed
dampers as required to achieve the correct system balance. All at no additional
cost to the Owner.
D.
Provide extended services on balancing for 90 days during which time any
resetting, re-adjustment or rebalancing shall be performed to any terminal, fan or
zone to correct comfort conditions or to confirm information submitted in balance
report. Provide technicians as needed to assist Engineer in making any tests he
may require during this time.
REPORT PREPARATION
A.
Assemble data, perform calculations using flow factors based on installed
equipment.
B.
Submit report including copies of findings, TBA Schedules, field data forms used,
documentation of instruments, certification procedures used and any further
backup material to substantiate results reported.
END OF SECTION
15990-3
SECTION 16010
GENERAL PROVISIONS-ELECTRICAL
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
The following drawings indicate the work required for this Division of Work:
All 'E' Drawings.
Applicable Site Drawings.
And All other contract drawings.
B.
C.
D.
Certain items of work pertaining to the work of this Division are provided under
other Divisions of the Specification. These include, but are not limited to the
following:
1.
Excavating and backfilling for underground primary and secondary electric,
telephone, television, and other building services provided under this
Division.
2.
Concrete work for equipment bases, transformer and switching pads, etc.
3.
Installation of access doors in finished construction.
4.
Installation of pipe sleeves in walls and floors.
5.
Framing of openings in walls, floors, roof.
6.
Chases, soffits, furred spaces required to conceal work of this Division.
Materials furnished under other Divisions and installed and/or wired by this
Division include, but are not limited to:
1.
Mechanical Equipment. (Motor Starters furnished under Division 15)
2.
Temperature Controls. (Refer to Sections 16921 and 15952 for scope)
3.
Sprinkler tamper and flow switches and accessories.
Participate in coordination of Mechanical and Electrical installations as described
in Section 100,1.03(J). Provide additional coordination drawings, as directed by
Architect, in areas of potential interferences.
All work shall comply with applicable codes and regulations, including, but not limited to
the following:
1.
Government of the District of Columbia Building, Fire Safety, and Health
Codes, as amended, including all codes, standards and regulations
16010-1
2.
1.02
1.03
referenced therein.
Requirements of Local, State, and Federal authorities having jurisdiction
over the Work.
3.
Current regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(OSHA).
4.
Requirements of affected Public Utility Companies.
5.
Special requirements set down by the Owner, the Owner's Insurance
Carrier, or other concerned entities.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Instructions to Bidders, the General Provisions of the Contract, including General
Conditions and General Requirements shall apply and be binding to the Contractor
and/or Subcontractor who performs this work.
B.
Where items of the General Conditions or Special Conditions are repeated in this
Section of the Specifications, it is intended to call particular attention to or to
qualify them; it is not intended that any other parts of the General Conditions shall
be assumed to be omitted if not repeated herein.
INTENT
A.
Intent of the specifications and drawings is to call for finished work, tested and
ready for operation.
B.
Material, fixtures, and equipment mentioned in specifications or shown on
drawings shall be furnished new, completely installed adjusted and left in a clean,
safe and satisfactory condition ready for operation. All supplied appliances and
connections of every sort necessary shall be furnished and installed to the
satisfaction of Architect and Owner.
C.
Apparatus, appliances, material or work not shown on the plans but mentioned in
specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories such as electrical
disconnect switches, circuit breakers, etc., necessary to make the work complete,
serviceable and perfect in all respects and ready for operation, even though not
particularly specified, shall be installed without additional expense to the Owner.
D.
Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation
and operation shall be included in the work as though herein specified or shown.
E.
Prior to submission of bids, give written notice to Architect of any materials or
apparatus believed to be inadequate or unsuitable, in violation of laws, ordinances,
rules or regulations of authorities having jurisdiction; or any necessary items or
work omitted. In the absence of such written notice, it is mutually agreed that the
16010-2
cost of all required items has been included and that all systems will function
satisfactorily without extra compensation.
16010-3
1.04
1.05
DEFINITIONS
A.
"Architect" means Crosskey Architects, Hartford, CT 06103.
B.
"Engineer" means Acorn Consulting Engineers, Inc., Mechanical/Electrical
Engineers, Inc., West Simsbury, CT 06092.
C.
"regulating authorities" or "authorities", means all Governmental, Utility, and
Insuring Authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
"Subcontractor or Contractor", means specifically the Subcontractor working
under his respective Section of Specifications.
E.
"furnish" or "provide" means to supply, erect, install and connect up complete in
readiness for regular operation the particular work referred to, unless otherwise
specified.
F.
"conduit" includes in addition to pipe, all fittings, connectors, hangers, and other
accessories relating to such and the plant and labor necessary to install same.
G.
"concealed" means hidden from sight in chases, furred spaces, hung ceilings,
embedded in construction, or buried underground.
H.
"exposed" means not "concealed" as defined above. Trenches, crawl spaces and
tunnels shall be considered "Exposed"unless specifically noted otherwise.
I.
"wire" or "wire up" means to properly connect the related item to the appropriate
source of power including all needed connectors, circuit breakers, switches and
other items necessary for normal operation of the item.
J.
"temperature control" means, in addition to thermostats all heating, ventilating, air
conditioning motorized dampers, solenoid valves, electrical air device actuators,
relays and other electrical accessories related to HVAC and other mechanical
systems.
DRAWINGS
A.
Drawings are generally diagrammatic and are intended to convey the scope of work
and indicate general arrangement. Deviations from the depicted arrangement shall
be approved by the Architect.
B.
Location of all items shown on drawings or called for in specifications, not
definitely fixed by dimension, are approximate only. Exact location necessary to
secure best conditions and results shall be determined at the project and shall have
the approval of the Architect.
16010-4
C.
Follow the drawings in laying out work. Check drawings of other trades to verify
spaces in which work will be installed to insure maximum headroom and space
conditions.
D.
Work shown on the drawings is intended to be approximately correct to the scale of
the drawings. Figured dimensions and detailed drawings are in all cases to take
precedence over them. Typical details shall apply to each and every item of the
project where such items are incorporated. Drawings utilize symbols and
schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work. These have no dimensional
significance, nor do they delineate every item required for the intended installation.
Work shall be installed in accordance with the diagrammatic intent of the Electrical
drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final Architectural
and Structural working drawings and on equipment shop drawings.
E.
No interpretation shall be made from the limitations of symbols and diagrams that
any elements necessary for complete work are excluded.
F.
Details appear on the drawings which are specific with the regard to the
dimensioning and positioning of the work. These are intended for the purpose of
establishing general feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination.
G.
If directed by the Architect or Owner, make reasonable modifications in the layout
to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work.
H.
Abide by and comply with the true intent of the drawings and specifications taken as
a whole, to provide a complete job ready for operation. "Drawings and
specifications taken as a whole" means all contract plans and
specifications -- Architectural, Structural and all Subcontractors' drawings and
specifications. Refer to drawings and specifications of other trades to check if
equipment or items included under other Sections will require work in order to
comply with the statement above "to provide a complete job ready for operation".
This work shall be included in the Base Contract. It shall be understood that the
indication and/or description of any item, on the drawings or specifications, or both,
carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the item, regardless of whether or
not this instruction is explicitly stated.
I.
No statement in the specifications or any omission in either plans or specifications
should be misunderstood as relieving the contractor from providing a complete job
ready for operation. All existing circuits and devices shall be energized and tested
before the completion of the project, contractor shall supply all the required
material, labor and equipment necessary for a complete installation.
No
exclusions from, or limitations in, the language used in drawings or specifications
shall be interpreted as meaning that the items or accessories necessary to complete
any required system or item of equipment are to be omitted.
J.
Information as to the general construction shall be derived from Structural and
Architectural Drawings and Specifications only.
16010-5
K.
1.06
The use of words in the singular shall not be considered as limiting where other
indications indicate that more than one item is referred to.
VISITING THE SITE
A.
1.07
1.08
Before submitting a proposal, examine the site of the proposed work and any
existing buildings, to determine conditions that may affect the work. Bidder will be
held responsible for any assumptions made in that regard.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Within sixty (60) days after award of contract, submit, through the General
Contractor, to the Architect for review, a list of manufacturers of all materials and
equipment proposed for use on the project. Indicate on submittal which items are
substituted.
B.
A review, without exception, of this list does not constitute approval, nor does it
guarantee acceptance of the shop drawings when submitted.
C.
The contractor's intent to purchase the exact make specified does not relieve him
from the responsibility to submit this list. Failure to submit this list will require the
contractor to supply the exact item specified as the basis for design.
D.
Submittal of items which differ from those specified or indicated as the basis for
design carries the implicit guarantee that the substituted item will provide the
intended service and is compatible with other items or systems interfacing with it.
E.
When proposing a substitute item, the contractor is responsible for all costs of
accommodating the substitution, including, but not limited to, space and
accessibility, modifications required to other systems, structural adequacy and the
like.
F.
If substitutions require the Architect or Engineer to prepare sketches or revised
drawings in order to become acceptable, the cost of such sketches, drawings, or
engineering shall be borne by the contractor.
G.
When substitutions require Engineer or Architect to spend an inordinate time for
review os substitutions, the cost of review over four (4) hours will be charged to the
contractor who made the submittal.
EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A.
Equipment and materials required under these specifications shall be new and
without blemish or defect. Equipment shall bear labels attesting to Underwriters
Laboratories approval where subject to Underwriters Laboratories label service.
Where no specific indication as to a type or quality of material or equipment is
indicated, a first class standard article shall be furnished.
16010-6
B.
1.09
1.10
All equipment of one type shall be the products of a single manufacturer.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
After acceptance of List of Manufacturers required under paragraph 1.07(A) of this
Section, and prior to delivery of materials and equipment to the project site, submit
eight (8) copies of shop drawings of each item for review by the Architect.
B.
Each submittal shall contain a complete list of all materials contained within.
Include intended use for each item.
C.
Shop drawings shall consist of manufacturer's scale drawings, cuts or catalogs,
including descriptive literature and complete characteristics of equipment,
including, but not limited to, dimensions, capacity, code compliance, motor and
drive and testing, construction, electrical characteristics, support, all as required for
this project.
D.
Architect may designate submittal of physical samples for review on items where
actual color, texture or other characteristics might not be adequately described by a
drawing or written material. Upon approval of a sample, each and every item of
that sort must be identical to the approved sample.
E.
Samples, drawings, specifications, catalogs, etc., submitted for review shall be
labeled indicating specific service for which material or equipment is to be used,
Section and Article Number of Specification governing, Subcontractor's name and
name of project.
F.
Approval rendered on shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of
measurements or building conditions. Where drawings are reviewed, said review
does not mean that drawings have been checked in detail; said review does not in
any way relieve the Subcontractor from his responsibility of furnishing material or
performing work according to Contract Documents.
G.
Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not be cause for an
extension of contract time, and no claim by reason of such default will be allowed.
H.
Submittals for all systems which require the interconnection of three or more
devices shall include a system block diagram. The diagram shall be of the one line
type and with sufficient detail to show interfaces and method of operation.
I.
Material or equipment installed prior to review shall be liable for removal and
replacement at no extra charge to the Owner if the material or equipment does not
meet the intent of Drawings and Specifications.
RECORD DRAWINGS
16010-7
1.11
1.12
1.13
A.
Obtain from the Architect a clean set of blue-line prints and during construction
indicate any deviations in routing, arrangement, elevation or size thereon.
B.
"As-Built" drawings shall be kept up to date concurrently with the progress of the
work and turned over to the Architect for review at the conclusion of the project,
prior to application for final payment.
C.
Exact location of all conduits and utilities under floor slabs shall be indicated and
dimensioned on these drawings, as well as the final arrangement of conduits and
junction boxes in concealed chases, concealed in walls or above ceilings.
LAWS, ORDINANCES, CODES, PERMITS AND FEES
A.
Give all necessary notices, obtain all permits and pay all governmental taxes, fees
and other costs in connection with the work. File all necessary plans, prepare all
documents and obtain all necessary approvals of governmental departments having
jurisdiction. Obtain all required Certificate of Inspection of the work and deliver to
Architect prior to application for final payment.
B.
Materials furnished and work installed shall comply with the rules and
recommendations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, with all requirements
of utility companies, with the Board of Health, with the recommendations of the fire
insurance rating organization having jurisdiction, with the local and state building
codes, and with the requirements of all governmental departments having
jurisdiction. If contract requirements are in excess of applicable codes, rules or
regulations, contract provisions shall be given precedence.
C.
Provide utility services as required and as indicated on Drawings and in 1.01(D),
above.
ROYALTIES AND PATENTS
A.
Pay all royalties and defend all suits and claims for infringement of any patent rights
and save the Owner harmless on account thereof.
B.
If it is observed that a process or article specified is an infringement of a patent,
promptly notify the Architect in writing. If any work is performed knowing it is to
be an infringement of a patent, all costs arising therefrom shall be borne by the
Contractor.
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
A.
Certain standard and staple materials may be described by reference to standard
specifications. The standards referred to are as follows:
ASA
ASHRAE
American Standards Association
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration
16010-8
and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
NBFU
National Board of Fire Underwriters
NEC
National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
UL
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
FM
Factory Mutual Insurance Company
IRI
Industrial Risk Insurers (Formerly FIA)
IES
Illuminating Engineering Society
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
B.
1.14
INTERPRETATION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A.
1.15
The particular specification will be identified by appropriate prefix and number
only, with the latest or legally defined revision being applicable.
Questions or disagreements arising as to the intent of the specifications or the
drawings, or the kind and quality of work required thereby, shall be decided by the
Architect whose interpretation thereof shall be final, conclusive and binding on all
parties.
PROCEDURE OF WORK
NOT USED
1.16
CHANGES TO WORK
A.
1.17
COORDINATION OF TRADES
A.
1.18
During the progress of the work, the Architect may make any changes, alterations,
additions or omissions to work drawn or specified after having agreed on an
equitable allowance to be added to or deducted from the contract price. Claims for
extra cost to cover extra work will not be allowed unless specifically authorized in
writing by the Architect prior to the execution of such additional work.
Give full cooperation to other trades and furnish any information necessary to
permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible
interference or delay.
PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY
A.
Be responsible for the maintenance and protection of equipment, materials and tools
stored or installed on the job site, from loss or damage of all causes, until final
acceptance by the Owner.
16010-9
B.
1.19
1.20
1.21
Be responsible for the protection of finished work of other trades from damage or
defacement and remedy any such injury at no additional cost to the Owner.
CUTTING, PATCHING AND PAINTINGS
A.
Cutting, patching and painting shall be done by the General Contractor unless
otherwise noted on plans or specifications.
B.
Cooperate with the General Contractor in making sure that sleeves are set and chases
provided for the installation of the work. If failure to do so makes it necessary to
cut and patch any part of the completed structure, this shall be done at the expense of
the subcontractor having jurisdiction over the work.
TEMPORARY OPENINGS
A.
Ascertain whether any special temporary openings in the building will be required
for the admission of apparatus and notify the Contractor accordingly.
B.
Failure to give sufficient notice to the Contractor in time to arrange for these
openings during construction, shall result in this subcontractor's assumption of all
costs pertaining to making and repairing any such temporary openings.
MANUFACTURER'S IDENTIFICATION
A.
1.22
Manufacturer's nameplate, name or trademark shall be permanently affixed to all
material and equipment furnished under this specification. The nameplate of a
subcontractor or distributor will not be acceptable.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify each control and item of equipment with a permanently attached nameplate
made of black surface, white core laminated plastic with incised letters, bearing the
name of the equipment item and designation of the item taken from the drawings or
schedules.
B.
Identify electrical feeders and risers where they enter or leave a junction box or
cabinet with fiber tags having the cable designation stamped thereon and tied
securely to each cable or by means of printed plastic self-adhering labels attached to
the cable sheath.
C.
Subcontractor shall label all cabinet, panels, pull boxes, etc., in the electrical system
using the designations shown on the plans and schedules such as -- "PANEL H1",
"MDP-1", etc., using incised laminated plastic nameplates securely attached.
D.
Provide typewritten directory cards in all electric panels showing circuit numbers
16010-10
and area or load serviced.
E.
1.23
Refer to Section 16195.
INSTRUCTION BOOKS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Furnish three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals in hard cover covering
all electrical systems in the project. Include manufacturer's approved submittal of
each item. Submit for review of Architect.
B.
Manuals shall contain, as a minimum, the following:
C.
D.
1.
Description of the project and major subsystems.
2.
Descriptive text covering the startup, adjustment, trouble-shooting, and safe
shutdown for each system.
3.
Copies of each typewritten panel directory.
4.
Copies of lighting control wiring diagrams and description of operation.
5.
A schedule of maintenance based on the manufacturer's recommendations,
showing what work is to be performed and at what intervals.
6.
Copies of the finally approved submittal for each item, together with the
manufacturer's installation, operation, and maintenance instructions and
parts lists.
7.
List of Firm names, addresses, telephone numbers to be contacted for regular
or emergency service, or purchase of parts.
Manuals shall be arranged in one or more three-ring binders, completely indexed as
follows:
1.
General information; Items 1, 2, 3, & 7 above.
2.
Control system information; Item 4.
3.
Approved submittal, maintenance, and parts information; Items 5 & 6.
4.
Each section shall be identified by a permanent index tab.
5.
Each item within a major section shall be separately indexed for quick
reference.
Provide adequate written and/or verbal instructions to the Owner's operating
personnel and such others as the Owner may designate. As a minimum, contractor
16010-11
shall provide for three (3), eight hour working days of instructions. Individual
equipment or system Specifications may require additional or different periods of
instruction.
1.24
1.25
1.26
SLEEVES, INSERTS AND ANCHOR BOLTS
A.
Be responsible for the location and proper position of sleeves and anchor bolts. If
failure to do so requires cutting and patching of finished work, it shall be done at the
Subcontractor's expense.
B.
Conduits passing through concrete or masonry floors, walls or partitions shall be
provided with sleeves having an internal diameter 1/2" larger than the outside of the
conduit.
C.
Sleeves through concrete floors or interior masonry walls shall be Schedule 40 black
steel pipe, set flush with wall, floor or ceiling surface. Sleeve through floors shall
be packed with a fireproof, resilient material to maintain the fire rating integrity of
the assembly and caulked with waterproof compound to the approval of the
Architect.
D.
Sleeves through floors of wet areas such as equipment rooms, toilets, etc., shall
extend 2" above finished floor surface and be sealed watertight.
ACCESSIBILITY
A.
Install work so that all parts are readily accessible for inspection, maintenance and
repair.
B.
Be fully informed regarding peculiarities and limitations of space available for the
installation of materials and apparatus.
C.
See that all equipment items are made easily accessible for adjustment and
operation.
D.
Where such items must be located over non-access ceilings, in chases or other
inaccessible places, access doors and/or panels of a type and size approved by the
Architect shall be supplied and delivered to the General Contractor for installation.
E.
Items requiring access are to be grouped to keep size and quantity of access doors to
a minimum.
F.
Access doors installed in walls, floors or ceilings shall have the same fire rating as
the wall, floor or ceiling.
ELECTRICAL WORK
A.
Install and wire up complete all electrical switches, starters and unmounted motors
16010-12
and other electrical equipment supplied by other trades.
1.27
B.
Furnish separate disconnect switches for all motors controlled by magnetic starters.
C.
Each trade supplying electrically operated equipment for installation and wiring by
this Subcontractor is to furnish sufficiently detailed instructions and wiring
diagrams for their installation.
D.
Control devices that include mechanical elements such as float switches, alternators,
temperature and pressure switches or controls, damper operators or the like, shall be
installed by the trade furnishing them, ready for wiring by this Subcontractor, unless
otherwise indicated.
E.
Equipment including a number of electrical items in a single enclosure or common
base shall be supplied to the job site internally wired as a unit, to numbered
terminals, ready for wiring connections.
ELECTRIC MOTORS
A.
1.28
1.29
Motors shall conform to all applicable regulations and be suitable for the load, duty,
voltage, phase, frequency, service and location intended.
TEMPORARY POWER
A.
Furnish and install all required temporary electrical services, including lighting and
ground-fault circuit-interrupter receptacles as required for construction purposes.
B.
In all of the above cases, furnish the appropriate trades, well in advance of their
work schedule, with all information, dimensions, templates, wiring diagrams and
devices necessary to coordinate the work.
C.
Be responsible for any additional costs incurred as a result of his failure to furnish
information sufficiently in advance to allow for proper coordination.
TESTS
A.
Test systems and equipment as required by the various Sections of the
Specifications.
B.
Tests to be witnessed by and to the satisfaction of the Architect or his representative
and such others as may have legal jurisdiction.
C.
Work shall be tested, repaired and retested until an approved test is achieved.
D.
Damages resulting from tests shall be repaired or damaged work replaced to the
satisfaction of Architect and Owner.
16010-13
1.30
1.31
E.
Testing must be completed successfully prior to concealment of the work.
F.
Completed systems shall be tested for proper operation, capacity and function.
Insofar as possible, systems normally operated during certain seasons of the year
shall be tested during the appropriate season.
G.
Costs of all tests shall be borne by the appropriate Contractor.
QUIET OPERATION
A.
All equipment shall be isolated from the building structure by approved means.
Noises and hum of equipment shall be absorbed or attenuated so as not to be
objectionable.
B.
Where sound or vibration levels are considered objectionable by the Architect, they
shall be corrected in a manner approved by the Architect, at no additional cost to the
Owner.
USE OF INSTALLATION BY OWNER
A.
1.32
1.33
Owner shall have the privilege of using any part of the work when sufficiently
complete, but such use shall not be considered as an acceptance of the work.
CLEANUP
A.
Systems, enclosures, and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, inside and out,
before being placed into operation.
B.
Keep the site free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish. At conclusion
of the work, remove all surplus materials, tools, construction equipment and rubbish
from the site and leave the premises in a clean condition.
GUARANTEE AND SERVICE
A.
Guarantee that all work will be free from defects in workmanship and/or materials
and that all apparatus will achieve the capacities and characteristics specified. If,
during the period of one (1) year, or as otherwise indicated, from certificate of
completion of the work, defects in material or workmanship appear, remedy such
defects without cost to the Owner. In default thereof, the Owner may have such
work done and charge the cost to the appropriate Contractor or Subcontractor.
Also, indemnify the Owner for any property damage which might result from such a
defect which made repairs necessary.
B.
Certain equipment will require guarantee periods exceeding one year due to the need
for seasonal operation. In such case, the guarantee will extend through at least one
full, continuous season.
16010-14
C.
1.34
Any fault in a system shall be corrected, and any work damaged in the course of this
correction shall be repaired, replaced and restored to its original condition at no
additional cost to the Owner.
INSURANCE
NOT USED
1.35
SCAFFOLDING, RIGGING AND HOISTING
A.
1.36
PROGRESS SCHEDULE
A.
1.37
Unless otherwise indicated, the work of each Section includes all scaffolding,
rigging, hoisting and services necessary for the delivery, erection and installation in
place of all equipment and apparatus furnished and the removal of same when no
longer required.
Keep informed of progress schedules of all other trades and work in accordance with
the project schedule to ensure timely completion of this work.
WORKMANSHIP
A.
All work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall conform to
the best trade practices for such work.
END OF SECTION
16010-15
SECTION 16012
DEMOLITION AND REMOVALS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
GENERAL
A.
The General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions
apply to this Section of the Specifications.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Removal of all existing building electrical systems as
required for renovation of the designated areas of the
building.
B.
Coordinate with Division 15 the disconnection of the
existing electrical services to building mechanical
systems being removed.
C.
It is the intent of this Specification that all items being
removed as required on drawings shall be removed from the
premises..
D.
The owner shall be responsible for the removal of the
existing lighting fixtures and associated ballasts.
Contractor to remove all associated circuiting and
switching devices as required per drawings.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
NFPA 70 - 1996 - National Electric Code.
1.04 DEMOLITION/REMOVAL SCHEDULE
A.
Removal/Demolition schedule shall be
approval to the Owner prior to start.
submitted
1.05 RELATED WORK
for
A.
Section 16010 - General Provisions - Electrical
B.
Section 15012 - Demolition and Removals - Mechanical
PART 2
PRODUCTS
NOT USED
16012-1
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS
A.
Any materials designated by the Owner for retention shall
be, after removal, delivered to the Owner's representative
at any designated location within the District of Columbia.
B.
Materials and equipment not being retained by Owner shall
be removed from the site and disposed of in a proper, legal
manner. Contractor shall pay all costs for cartage,
disposal and testing.
3.02 PATCHING
A.
Patch all penetrations through walls and floors in
building which are not to be re-used so as to match adjacent
surfaces.
B.
Patch all structural members or surfaces damaged as a
result of removal activities so as to preserve the
integrity of these members.
3.03 PROTECTION
A.
Adequately protect premises against accumulation of dust,
dirt, and debris.
B.
Protection methods shall be approved by the Owner in
advance of starting work.
3.04 EXISTING ELECTRIC SERVICE
NOT USED.
3.05 BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING
A.
All existing branch circuits connected to devices being
replaced shall be reconnected to said devices .
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A.
All electrical connections to existing mechanical
equipment shall be reconnected to new equipment.
END OF SECTION
16012-2
SECTION 16025
SEISMIC BRACING
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Lateral seismic bracing for all conduits and equipment, suspended or base
mounted.
B.
Include calculations, attachments, bracing members.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 16010 - General Provisions-Electrical.
B.
REFERENCES
A.
Government of the District of Columbia Building Code.
B.
NFPA 70 - 1996, National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit sketches of proposed bracing systems for suspended equipment, including
loads, etc.
B.
Provide documentation that vibration isolators and anchor bolts will have
properties sufficient to withstand required forces.
C.
Sketches and calculations submittals shall bear the seal and signature of a structural
Engineer licensed in the State of Connecticut.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate bracing design and installation with work of other Sections.
B.
Bracing schemes may be jointly reviewed by Electrical and Structural Engineer and
Architect. Provide whatever detail is required by each.
16025-1
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.
Bracing shall be fabricated from standard structural or trade sections.
B.
Attachments to masonry walls shall be by means of expansion shields and bolts.
C.
Attachment to building structure shall meet approval of Structural Engineer.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
PROCEDURE
A.
Provide lateral bracing in all directions for all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc.,
sufficient to resist the lateral forces determined under Government of the District of
Columbia Building Code.
B.
Bracing calculations shall be based on a Seismic Hazard Exposure Group II and
a Seismic Performance Category C, using the following factors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Peak Velocity-Related Acceleration (A v ):
0.13
Seismic Coefficient (C c )
Emergency and Fire Protection Systems:
2.0
Communication systems, bus ducts, primary systems
2.0
All Equipment base mounted, suspended, or attached to building
and transformer:
2.0
Panelboards and lighting fixtures:
0.67
Pendant mounted fixtures:
1.5
Performance Criteria Factor (P):
Emergency and Fire Protection Systems:
1.5
Communication systems, bus ducts, primary systems
1.0
All Equipment base mounted, suspended, or attached to building
and transformer:
1.0
Panelboards and lighting fixtures:
1.0
Pendant mounted fixtures:
1.0
2.0
Attachment Amplification Factor (a c ):
Operating Weight of Equipment (W p ):
As required
C.
Conduit less than 2-1/2 inches need not be seismically braced. Conduit installed
within 12 inches from the top of conduit to the supporting building member need
not be braced.
D.
The vertical support for a pendant mounted fixture shall have a safety factor of 4.0.
E.
The force calculated shall be applied at the center of gravity of the component
16025-2
nonconcurrently in a horizontal direction. Attachments shall be by positive
connection, frictional forces shall be neglected.
3.02
3.03
3.04
F.
A separate calculation shall be made for each equipment item.
G.
Provide bracing for all suspended and/or base mounted equipment and conduit,
except as excluded under Note "f" of Table 1113.10 of the Code..
H.
Attachments to building elements shall only be made at locations having sufficient
strength and rigidity to absorb the forces calculated.
SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT
A.
Provide bracing such that the effectiveness of equipment vibration isolators is not
reduced.
B.
Vibration isolators, where called for, shall have sufficient lateral stability to resist
the forces involved.
BASE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
A.
Equipment attached directly to the structure, or on foundation or housekeeping
pads, shall be provided with anchor bolts having sufficient strength in shear to
absorb the calculated lateral forces in all directions.
B.
Isolated, base mounted equipment shall, in addition to verification of anchor bolt
strength, have isolation having lateral stability and snubbing capacity to absorb the
calculated lateral forces in all directions.
CONDUIT BRACING
A.
3.05
ESSENTIAL EQUIPMENT
A.
3.06
As defined under 3.01 above.
Essential building equipment including, but not limited to, emergency power and
lighting systems, fire protection systems, shall be braced as provided for above,
except that the force calculations shall use a Seismic Coefficient of 2.0 and a
Performance Criteria factor of 1.5.
FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION
A.
Fabricate from standard materials.
B.
Locate and install bracing so that access to the equipment for service, maintenance
and repair will not be impeded. Bracing shall be arranged so that there will be no
impediment to removal or replacement of the entire unit or piece of equipment.
16025-3
END OF SECTION
16025-4
SECTION 16100
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
A.
Furnish all labor, materials, appliances, fixtures, tools, equipment, and services
pertaining to the complete installation and construction of the project's electrical
systems.
B.
This Section covers generalities regarding the Electrical Work. More specific
requirements are found in the other Sections of Division 16.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section 16010 - General Provisions - Electrical.
B.
C.
Applicable Sections of Division 15, Mechanical.
REFERENCES
All work must conform to the 1996 National Electrical Code (NFPA-70), the
Government of the District of Columbia Building Code and Fire Safety Code
(NFPA-101).
SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
1.05
GENERAL
Submit material on all products in accordance with requirements of Section 16010.
PRODUCTS
UNDERGROUND CONDUIT SLEEVES
A.
Provide where indicated on drawings for telephone, fire alarm, power, and various
other cabling requirements.
B.
Seal ends of conduits with approved water-resistant packing to prevent entrance of
earth or water.
16100-1
16100-2
2.02
RACEWAYS
A.
2.03
2.04
2.06
SLEEVES
A.
Through fire rated building elements: UL approved for the application and rating.
B.
Through new construction: 18 gage galvanized sheet metal, flush with surface on
both sides.
C.
Through existing construction: Neatly core-bored hole or schedule 40 steel pipe
sleeve, securely mortared into place.
D.
Wet Locations: Extend sleeve 2" above finished floor. If hole is core-bored,
provide sheet metal collar sealed to opening, extending 2" above floor.
WIRE AND CABLE
A.
2.05
BRANCH CIRCUITS
A.
Provide all conduits, outlets, wiring for all power, lighting, control, equipment,
motor, and special systems in the project.
B.
All Electrical work on the project shall be provided under this Division unless
specifically stated elsewhere.
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Furnish grounding conductors as indicated on drawings. All metallic parts of the
system, including conduit, raceways, supports, switchboards, transformer neutrals,
cabinets, and equipment shall be grounded in accordance with the 1996 National
Electrical Code, and as indicated on the drawings. Separate insulated grounding
conductor shall be installed in all conduits and in cable assemblies for all branch
circuits and feeders. Outer metal jacket of cables or raceways shall not be used as
the only method of grounding.
B.
Distribution systems shall be provided with a separate grounding conductor for
each three-phase feeder, for each branch circuit having a three phase protective
device.
C.
Required grounding conductor shall be installed in raceway with related phase
and/or neutral conductors. Equipment grounding conductors are indicated on
drawings. Where not indicated, they shall be provided in accordance with Table
16100-3
250-95 of the NEC.
D.
Grounding system shall have a resistance of not greater than 3 ohms and shall be
measured before equipment is placed in operation.
E.
Ground connectors shall be clamp type and bolts, nuts, lock washer and other
components shall insure a permanent, corrosion resistant assembly. Connectors
shall be as manufactured by Burndy, Ilsco, or O-Z.
F.
Equipment grounding system shall be connected to ground rod grid for system
grounding. Install grounding conductor to ground rod grounding system for
telephone service. Ground rods copper clad steel, 3/4" diameter, not less than 10'-0"
long.
PART 3
3.01
3.02
3.03
EXECUTION
LOCATION OF OUTLETS
A.
Coordinate work with other trades so that exact roughing locations are available for
all devices and equipment.
B.
Locations shown on drawings are subject to modification due to conditions arising
during construction. Such changes shall be executed as part of the work of this
Section. Verify locations shown on drawings with Architect and/or Owner,
correcting discrepancies as they arise, all at no additional cost to the Owner.
C.
Outlets in equipment spaces shall be roughed after final location of piping and
equipment has been established.
RACEWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Exposed raceways passing through walls, floors or ceilings shall be fitted with
escutcheon plates.
B.
Installation of raceways shall not weaken the building elements, and shall not affect
their fire resistance rating.
C.
Install conduit and raceways plumb and level, parallel to lines of building. All
conduits and raceways to be concealed, except as noted on the Drawings.
Conduits that cannot be concealed shall be brought to the attention of the Architect
so he can render an alternate conduit method. Use of surface mounted raceways
shall be approved only by Architect and Engineer.
CIRCUITING
Connect each device, fixture or equipment item to the appropriate poles of the proper
panel.
16100-4
Arrange branch circuits to balance the loads on the phases of the panel feeder. Where 120
volt, 3 or 4 wire circuits are indicated, the circuit shall consist of separate phases
and a common neutral. Maximum phase unbalance shall not exceed 10%.
For all receptacles identified for computer or data run a separate dedicated neutral for each
homerun identified on the drawings.
3.04
GROUNDING CABLES
A.
Lay grounding cables slack to prevent damage. Connections to have bright, clean,
metal contact. Connections to be readily accessible for inspection and for checking
resistance of ground system.
END OF SECTION
16100-5
SECTION 16111
CONDUIT
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
GENERAL
A.
The General Conditions and Supplemental General Conditions
apply to this Section of the Specifications.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
A.
Rigid metal conduit and fittings.
B.
Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) and fittings.
C.
Electric metallic tube (EMT) and fittings.
D.
Liquidtight flexible metal conduit and fittings.
E.
Surface metal raceways.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A.
B.
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated.
B.
ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated.
C.
ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable
Assemblies.
D.
FS WW-C-563 - Electrical Metallic Tubing.
E.
FS WW-C-566 - Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit.
F.
FS WW-C-581 - Specification for Galvanized Rigid Conduit.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit:
ANSI C80.1.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; threaded
type, material to match conduit.
16111-1
2.02 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC) AND FITTINGS
A.
Conduit:
Galvanized steel.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; use fittings
and conduit bodies specified above for rigid steel conduit.
2.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A.
Electrical Metallic Tubing.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
Material to Match.
2.04 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
A.
Conduit:
Flexible metal conduit with PVC jacket.
B.
Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
ANSI/NEMA FB 1.
2.05 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS
A.
As manufactured by Wiremold, Inc., type and size as
indicated on Drawings.
2.06 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A.
Conduit Clamps, Straps, and Supports:
iron. Refer to Section 16190.
Steel or malleable
2.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.
Rigid steel threaded conduit shall be as manufactured by
one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wheatland Tube Company.
Youngstown Sheet and Tube Company.
Republic Steel Corporation.
Triangle.
Electrical metallic tubing shall be steel, electrically
welded and galvanized, and shall be as manufactured by one
of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Youngstown Sheet and Tube Company.
Republic Steel Corporation.
C.
Couplings and box connectors shall be concrete-tight, set
screw type as manufactured by one of the following:
1.
Raco, Inc.
2.
Appleton electric Company.
3.
Efcor Div.
D.
Furnish and install where indicated on drawings steel
16111-2
surface metal raceways and wireways as manufactured by:
1.
2.
3.
Wiremold Company.
Columbia Metal Products.
E.
Flexible steel conduit shall have an integral bond wire for
grounding and shall be as manufactured by Sealtite,
American Flexible Conduit Company, or Triangle/pwc.
Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be used where
flexibility and protection from liquids, vapors, or solids
is needed.
F.
Aluminum conduit and fittings will not be allowed unless
specifically noted on drawings.
PART 3
EXECUTION
3.01 CONDUIT SIZING, ARRANGEMENT, AND SUPPORT
A.
Size conduit for conductor type and number installed, 3/4
inch minimum size.
B.
Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present a neat
appearance.
C.
Route exposed conduit and conduit above accessible
ceilings, parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent
piping.
D.
Maintain minimum 6 inch clearance between conduit and
piping. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and
heat sources such as flues, steam pipes, and heating
appliances.
E.
Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion or
alignment by wire pulling operations.
Fasten conduit
using galvanized straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis
hangers, or bolted split stamped galvanized hangers.
F.
Group conduit in parallel runs where practical and use
conduit rack constructed of steel channel with conduit
straps or clamps. Provide space for 25 percent additional
conduit.
G.
Do not fasten conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps.
Remove all wire used for temporary conduit support during
construction, before conductors are pulled.
H.
Support conduit at a maximum of 10 feet on center. Follow
Article 346 of the National Electrical Code, 1996.
I.
All conduits and cable assemblies are to be concealed
unless otherwise noted.
16111-3
16111-4
3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.
Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut
ends.
B.
Bring conduit to the shoulder of fittings and couplings and
fasten securely.
C.
Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts for fastening conduit
to cast boxes, and for fastening conduit to sheet metal
boxes in damp or wet locations.
D.
Install no more than the equivalent of four 90-degree bends
between boxes.
E.
Use conduit fittings to make sharp changes in direction,
as around beams.
F.
Use hydraulic bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit
larger than 2 inch size.
G.
Avoid moisture traps where possible; where unavoidable,
provide junction box with drain fitting at conduit low
point, all underground conduits shall be water tight to
prevent the entrance of subsurface water into the building.
H.
Use suitable conduit caps to protect installed conduit
against entrance of dirt and moisture.
I.
Provide No. 12 AWG insulated conductor or suitable pull
string in empty conduit, except sleeves and nipples.
J.
Install expansion joints where conduit crosses building
expansion joints.
K.
Where conduit penetrates fire-rated walls and floors,
provide mechanical firestop fittings with UL listed fire
rating equal to wall or floor rating.
3.03 CONTINUITY
A.
Complete raceway systems shall become metallically
continuous and shall be thoroughly grounded in accordance
with requirements of the National electrical Code, 1996.
3.04 CONDUIT/RACEWAY SCHEDULE
A.
Boiler Room: Rigid steel.
B.
All Other:
C.
Connections to Transformers and Machinery:
length Sealtite Flexible Conduit.
EMT.
16111-5
24" Minimum
D.
Below Grade, Below or In Slabs:
Rigid steel.
3.05 PVC CONDUITS
A.
Where indicated on Drawings, raceways may be Schedule 40
or Schedule 80 PVC, complete with compatible fittings.
B.
All PVC conduit runs must be electrically continuous using
a separate grounding conductor in addition to the
conductors specified for the run.
END OF SECTION
16111-6
SECTION 16120
WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Building wire.
B.
Cable.
C.
Wiring connections and terminations.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
REFERENCES
A.
NEMA WC 3 - Rubber-insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
B.
NEMA WC 5 - Thermoplastic-insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy.
C.
NFPA 70 - 1996 -National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
GENERAL
Submit product data for Wire and Cable under provisions of Section 16010.
PRODUCTS
BUILDING WIRE
A.
Thermoplastic - insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 5.
B.
Rubber-insulated Building Wire: NEMA WC 3.
16120-1
2.02
C.
Feeders and Branch Circuits Larger Than 6 AWG; Copper, stranded conductor,
600 volt insulation, THW, THHN/THWN.
D.
Feeders and Branch Circuits 6 AWG and Smaller: Copper conductor, 600 volt
insulation, THW OR THHN/THWN, 6 and 8 AWG, stranded conductor; smaller
than 8 AWG, solid conductor.
E.
Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600 volt insulation, THW.
F.
Wire sizes #6 and larger shall be stranded. All sizes called for in the specifications
or on the plans are American Wire Gauge sizes. Conductors shall be copper,
unless noted differently.
G.
All wire shall be factory color-coded with a separate color for phase, switch and
neutral used consistently throughout. The neutral wire of all branch circuits shall
be white. Green shall be used for equipment grounding conductors. Feeders
shall be phase color coded at all access points.
H.
The use of MC or SER cable for panel feeders is acceptable where concealed.
Exposed feeders shall be run in EMT or RGC.
I.
The use of MC cable and NM cable is acceptable as required by code or as unless
otherwise noted elsewhere.
Where MC cable is permitted under this
specification, its use shall be governed by Article 334 of the National Electric Code
and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
J.
Cables are required to be installed per NEC. All installation shall be
coordinated with construction types and NEC requirements. Coordinate
types of construction with Architectural plans and specifications. Install
cables in conduit where required by NEC.
K.
Provide plenum rated cable where required. Coordinate with Div. 15.
L.
All wiring for branch circuits and grounding shall be provided and installed
per NEC requirements. Any discrepancies to said requirements on
drawings shall be verified during bid process with Engineer.
REMOTE CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLE
A.
Control Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor,
600 volt insulation, rated 90 degree C. individual conductors twisted together, and
covered with an overall PVC jacket.
B.
Control Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper
conductor, 300 volt insulation, rated 90 degree C, individual conductors twisted
together, and covered with a PVC jacket; UL listed.
C.
Section A & B above shall be installed in E.M.T.
16120-2
PART 3
3.01
3.02
3.03
EXECUTION
GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A.
Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller
than 14 AWG for control wiring.
B.
Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer
than 75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200
feet.
C.
Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same raceway
or cable.
D.
Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.
E.
Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
F.
Make Conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.
G.
All wires and cables shall be continuous from origin to destination without running
splices. At the end of these wires and cables, a sufficient slack shall be left as
may be required for making proper connections.
H.
No grease or other component which contains acids shall be used in pulling wires
and cables.
I.
Where solid conductors are to be connected directly to the devices without the use
of lugs, such as occurs at lighting switches and plug receptacles, the wire shall be
formed into a loop to fit around the screw.
WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A.
Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling
lubricate for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires.
B.
Install wire in raceway after all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has
been completed.
C.
Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
B.
Support cables above accessible ceilings do not rest on ceiling tiles. Use spring
metal clips or cable ties to support cables from structure. Include bridle rings or
drive rings.
C.
Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
D.
Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices
16120-3
and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring
wire connectors with plastic caps.
3.04
E.
Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.
Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of
the insulation value of conductor.
F.
Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
G.
Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without
perceptible temperature rise.
H.
Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
A.
Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
B.
Torque test conductor connections
recommended values.
C.
Perform continuity test on all power and equipment branch circuit conductors.
Verify proper phasing connections.
D.
Conduits must be swabbed out and made thoroughly dry before pulling wire and
cable.
and terminations to manufacturer's
END OF SECTION
16120-4
SECTION 16130
BOXES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
WORK INCLUDED
A.
Pull and junction boxes.
B.
Device boxes.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box
Supports.
B.
NFPA 70 - 1996 - National Electrical Code.
SUBMITTALS
A.
PART 2
2.01
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
OUTLET BOXES
A.
Outlet boxes and covers shall be pressed steel, except as noted, and protected
against corrosion with zinc applied by the electric galvanizing, hot dipping or
sheradizing process.
B.
Outlet boxes shall be of sizes and type to accommodate:
1.
Structural conditions.
2.
Size and number of raceways and conductors or cable entering.
3.
Device or fixture for which required.
16130-1
2.02
2.03
C.
Outside lighting outlets shall have galvanized or cadmium plated cast iron boxes
with gaskets, drilled and tapped to take fixture specified for these locations.
D.
Floor boxes where shown on plans shall be adjustable, watertight, cast iron, with
brass cover and flange to match floor finish. Box shall be drilled and tapped to
accommodate entering conduits and furnished with power or low tension pedestal
head as indicated. Furnish in Steel City, National or equal.
E.
Cast Boxes: Cast feralloy, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs.
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A.
Sheet Metal Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.
B.
Sheet Metal Boxes larger than 12 Inches in any Dimension to be hinged enclosure.
C.
Cast Metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type
4 and Type 6, flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as raintight.
Galvanized cast iron box and cover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and
stainless steel cover screws.
BOXES AND FITTINGS
A.
Outlet boxes and fittings shall be installed at each outlet switch or junction point of
conduit.
B.
Outlet boxes shall be as manufactured by Steel City, National or Raco.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS
A.
Provide electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps,
wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance.
B.
Electrical box locations shown on Contract Drawings are approximate unless
dimensioned. Verify location of boxes and outlets prior to rough-in.
C.
Locate and install boxes to allow access.
D.
Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.
E.
Locate boxes in masonry walls to require minimum cutting. Coordinate masonry
cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes.
F.
Provide knockout closures for unused openings.
16130-2
G.
Support boxes independently of conduit except for cast boxes that are connected to
two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches of box.
H.
Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and
partition studs, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use
stamped steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel
channel fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.
I.
Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, and similar devices.
J.
Boxes shall set plumb and true in building surface and furnished with
suitable plaster rings where so required.
3.02
PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A.
Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished
areas.
B.
Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit.
END OF SECTION
16130-3
SECTION 16141
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
GENERAL
WORK INCLUDED
A.
All labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction
boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and
furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system.
B.
Wall Switches.
C.
Receptacles.
D.
Device Plates and Box Covers.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
REFERENCE
A.
FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
B.
FS W-S-896 - Switch, toggle.
C.
NEMA WD 1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
D.
NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
E.
NFPA 70, 1996 - National Electrical Code.
F.
ADA Federal Standard 28 CFR part 36.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Products supplied shall be from a manufacturer that has been continuously
involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5)
16141-1
years.
1.06
B.
All components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year waranty and meet all
Government of the District of Columbia Building and local applicable code
requirements.
C.
Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification
to be undamaged, free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in
conformance with the specifications. The suppliers obligation shall include repair
or replacement, and testing without charge to the owner, all or in parts of equipment
which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the
supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project.
Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year.
SUBMITTALS
A.
B.
Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and
C.
Contractor must submit data sheets on sensors, control units and all junction boxes
and mounting accessories, including all wiring diagrams.
PART 2
2.01
2.02
PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL SWITCHES.
A.
Hubbell
B.
Pass & Seymour.
C.
Arrow-Hart
WALL SWITCHES
A.
Wall Switches for Lighting Circuits, AC, general use, snap switch with toggle
handle, rated 20 amperes and 120-277 volts AC. Handle color: Ivory.
B.
Standard Switch: Hubbell 1221I
C.
Three Way Switch: Hubbell 1223I
D.
Key Switch: Hubbell 1221L
E.
Pilot Light Switch: Hubbell 1221PLC
16141-2
F.
2.03
2.04
2.05
2.06
A.
B.
Hubbell
Pass & Seymour.
C.
Arrow-Hart
RECEPTACLES
A.
Convenience Receptacle - Normal Power: Hubbell 5352I
B.
Convenience Receptacle - GFCI: Hubbell GF5352I
C.
Special Use Receptacles: Proper voltage, amperage, rating, and configuration for
the load served.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - WALL PLATES
A.
Hubbell
B.
Pass & Seymour
C.
Arrow-Hart
WALL PLATES
Stainless steel, 302/304 mechanics office, beveled edges, brushed finish, stainless
steel in other areas except repair area, machine shop.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
2.08
Other switch types to match the above.
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - RECEPTACLES
A.
2.07
The Watt Stopper, Inc., or approved equal.
PRODUCTS - OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
All products shall be Watt Stopper product numbers:
Wall Sensors: WI-200, 120 Volt.
B.
Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of gross motion up to 1,000
square feet.
C.
Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; and
shall have 180 degree coverage capability.
16141-3
D.
Passive Infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Lodif Fresnel lens, in a
multiple-tier configuration, with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up.
E.
All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electric ballast, PL lamp
systems, and rated motor loads.
F.
Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No
automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or
heating fans.
G.
All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable controls for time delay an
sensitivity. Controls shall be recessed to limit tampering.
H.
In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor.
When bypass is utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert
to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent
tampering.
I.
All sensors shall provide a method of indication to verify that motion is being
detected during testing and that the unit is working.
J.
All sensors shall have no leakage current to load in manual or in Auto/Off mode for
safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection.
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall switches 48 inches above floor, OFF position down.
B.
Install convenience receptacles 18 inches above floor; 6 inches above counters;
grounding pole on bottom, unless otherwise shown on drawings, contractor shall
change grounding pole at his expense if installed incorrectly.
C.
Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on Contract Drawings.
D.
Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.
E.
Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished
areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets.
F.
Install devices and wall plates flush and level.
G.
Verify all mounting heights with architectural drawings.
H.
Locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for complete and proper
volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas. Rooms
16141-4
shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage to completely cover
the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple
occupants at any location within in the room(s). The locations and quantities of
sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only rooms which
are to be provided with sensors. The contractor shall provide additional sensors if
required to properly and completely cover the prospective room.
END OF SECTION
16141-5
SECTION 16190
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
A.
Conduit and equipment supports.
B.
Fastening hardware.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
REFERENCES
PART 2
Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including
wiring, which they carry.
PRODUCTS
MATERIAL
A.
Support Channel: Galvanized or painted steel.
B.
Hardware: Corrosion resistant.
PART 3
3.01
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
2.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.05
GENERAL
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building
structure using precast insert system, expansion anchors, preset inserts or beam
clamps.
16190-1
3.02
B.
Use expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls, self-drilling
anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in sheet
metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction.
C.
Do not fasten supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
D.
Do not use powder-actuated anchors.
E.
Do not drill structural steel or concrete members.
F.
Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to
present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers
under all nuts.
G.
In wet locations install free-standing electrical equipment on concrete pads.
H.
Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
Provide steel channel supports to stand cabinet one inch off wall.
I.
Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and
panelboards in stud walls.
HANGERS AND ATTACHMENTS
A.
In general, the following methods of fastening of supports to building structure
shall be used.
1.
Bolts and expansion shields to be used in concrete slabs where weight does
not exceed 100 pounds per fastening.
2.
Inserts to be used in lightweight concrete structural slabs where weight does
not exceed 300 pounds per fastening.
3.
Inserts to be used in heavyweight concrete structural slabs where weight
does not exceed 500 pounds per fastening.
4.
Where the aforementioned fastening methods are not applicable or where
inserts have for any reason not been provided, supply a steel fishplate (l/4"
thick with area required) with thru-bolt for each fastening. Fishplate
assembly shall be chased into slab and grouted flush with top of slab.
B.
Provide such channel or angle iron members as may be necessary to bridge between
structural steel and receive supports for fastening. Such auxiliary steel shall be
welded to the structural steel.
C.
Supporting racks of angle iron, flat iron and channel iron members shall be
16190-2
provided for electrical work indicated as being supported from walls where such
walls are found to be incapable of supporting the weight.
1.
D.
Where provided, supporting racks shall be rigidly bolted or welded together
and adequately braced to provide a substantial structure. Racks shall be of
ample size to provide for a workmanlike arrangement of all equipment
thereon.
No metal enclosures of equipment, etc. for surface installation shall be mounted
directly on any wall. Provide flat bar members for a minimum of 1/4" space
between the wall and metal enclosure shall be installed.
END OF SECTION
16190-3
SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
A.
Nameplates and tape labels.
B.
Wire and cable markers.
C.
Panelboard Directories
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
REFERENCES
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit shop drawings in accordance with requirements of Section 16010.
B.
Include schedule for nameplates and tape labels.
PART 2
2.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.05
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.
Nameplates:
background.
Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white
B.
Tape Labels: Embossed adhesive tape will not be permitted for any application.
C.
Wire and Cable Marker: Cloth markers, split sleeve or tubing type.
16195-1
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates.
B.
Install nameplates parallel to equipment lines.
C.
Secure nameplates to equipment fronts using screws, rivets, or adhesive. Secure
nameplate to inside face of recessed panelboard doors in finished locations.
WIRE IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.03
Provide wire markers on each conductor in panelboard gutters, pull boxes, and at
load connection. Identify with branch circuit or feeder number for power and
lighting circuits, and with control wire number as indicated on equipment
manufacturer's shop drawings for control wiring.
NAMEPLATE ENGRAVING SCHEDULE
A.
Provide nameplates of minimum letter height as scheduled below.
Panelboards: 1/4 inch; identify equipment designation. 1/8 inch; identify voltage rating and
source.
Computer Receptacles: 1/8 inch; identify panel name and circuit number.
3.04
PANEL DIRECTORIES
A.
Provide neatly typed directory in door of each branch circuit panelboard identifying
each circuit, its use, and breaker size. Prepare directory only after all circuit
adjusting for phase balancing has been completed.
B.
Provide typed legend of circuits in each main circuit board and distribution panel.
END OF SECTION
16195-2
SECTION 16471
PANELBOARDS
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.03
Branch circuit panelboards.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
A.
National Electrical Code-2005.
B.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association-1999.
C.
National Fire Protection Association-(NFPA 101 with Appendix, 1997) .
D.
Construct panelboards to UL standards and provide UL labels.
PART 2
2.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.02
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products.
2.02
A.
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div.
B.
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
C.
Square D. Co.
ENCLOSURES
A.
Panels: Surface or flush mounted complete with panel trim having concealed
hinges and trim mounting screws. Provide locking door with flush catch.
B.
Tube: Galvanized.
16471-1
C.
2.03
Keys: Provide two keys for each panel. Make keys interchangeable for panels of
same voltage.
120/208 VOLT PANELBOARDS
A.
PART 3
3.01
Panelboards: 3 phase, 4 wire, solid neutral design with sequence style bussing and
full capacity neutral, composed of an assembly of bolt-in-place molded case
automatic circuit breakers with thermal and magnetic trip and trip free position
separate from either ON or OFF positions. Provide common simultaneous trip for
2 and 3 pole breakers. Provide interrupting ratings of 22,000 AIC for 208 volts.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Provide mounting brackets, busbar drilling, and filler pieces for unused spaces.
B.
Prepare and affix typewritten directory to inside cover of panelboard indicating
loads controlled by each circuit.
C.
Provide breaker for elevator shunt trip.
END OF SECTION
16471-2
SECTION 16491
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
GENERAL
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers
used for the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.02
1.03
Service disconnecting means
Feeder and branch circuit protection
Motor and equipment disconnecting means
DEFINITIONS
A.
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interruptor
B.
RMS: Root mean square
C.
SPDT: Single pole, double throw
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers’ data on features, performance,
electrical characteristics, ratings and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: For each switch and circuit breaker.
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections and details, including required
clearances and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of
installed devices, equipment features and ratings. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Current and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating
Features, characteristics, ratings and factory settings of individual
overcurrent protective devices and auxilary components.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal and control wiring. Differentiate between
16491-1
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
C.
Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that
enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components will withstand
seismic forces defined in Division 16100. Include the following:
1.
Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on
actual tests of assembled components or on calculation.
a.
2.
3.
Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply
with qualifications specified in “Quality Assurance” article.
E.
Manufacturers Field Service Report.
F.
Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers and for components
to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. In addition to
requirements specified in Division 1 section “Closeout Procedures,” include the
following:
3.
1.05
Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
D.
1.
2.
1.04
The term “withstand” means “the unit will remain in place without
separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the
seismic forces specified and the unit will be operational after the
seismic event.”
Routine maintenance requirements for components.
Manufacturer’s written instructions for testing and adjusting switches and
circuit breakers.
Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of circuit
breaker.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components
16491-2
with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment and adjacent
surfaces. Maintain required work-space clearances and required clearances for
equipment access doors and panels
16491-3
PART 2
2.01
PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1.
Fusible Switches:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
2.03
Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division
Square D Co.
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.02
Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products
General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division
Square D Co.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A.
Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B.
Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 amps and smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with
clips to accommodate specified fuses, lockable handle with two padlocks, and
interlocked with cover in closed position.
ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1.
2.
3.
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low
level over-loads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits..
Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes of 250 amps
and larger.
Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element
with front mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable
rating plug; with the following field-adjustable settings:
Instantaneous trip
Long- and short-time pickup levels
Long- and short-time, time adjustments
16491-4
Ground-fault pickup level with time delay
A.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip
ratings, and number of poles.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.04
ENCLOSURES
A.
NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1 to meet environmental conditions of installed
location.
1.
2.
3.
2.05
PART 3
Manufacturer’s standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
A.
3.02
Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R
Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel
Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
3.01
Lugs: Mechanical style suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material
of conductors.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; type SWD for switching
fluorescent lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and
refrigerating equipment.
Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with
adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and
ground-fault indicator.
Shunt Trip: 120 volt trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 55
percent of rated voltage.
Under-Voltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage with
field adjustable 0.1 to 0.6 second time delay.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers
for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in division 16100.
B.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and
brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
16491-5
3.03
C.
Install switches and circuit breakers according to manufacturer’s written
instructions.
D.
Provide circuit breaker type switches for all equipment for proper means of
disconnect per the NEC.
E.
Install switches and circuit breakers level, and plumb, within sight of and no more
than 20 feet from equipment being served.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
B.
3.04
3.05
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components;
provide warning signs as specified in Division 16100.
Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or
laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install equipment grounding connections for switches and circuit breakers with
ground continuity to main electriccal ground bus.
B.
Install wiring between switches and circuit breakers, and control and indication
devices.
C.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer’s published
torque tightening values. If manufacturer’s torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, circuit breaker,
component, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
Testing: After installing enclosed switches and circuit breakers and after electrical
circuitry has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with
requirements.
1.
2.
Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical
test indicated in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches and Section 7.6 for
molded-case circuit breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
16491-6
C.
Infrared Scanning: After substantial completion, but not more than 60 days after
final acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each enclosed switch and circuit
breaker. Open or remove doors or panels so connections are accessible to portable
scanner.
Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record
for device.
Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches and
circuit breakers checked and that describes scanning results. Include
notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations
after remedial action.
16491-7
3.06
ADJUSTING
Set field-adjusted switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.07
CLEANING
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not used compressed air to
assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
16491-8
SECTION 16500
LIGHTING
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Furnish and install lighting fixtures, lighting equipment and lamps and/or tubes for
all lighting outlets as shown on the plans and listed on the fixture schedule.
B.
Furnish and install all mounting accessories, brackets, stems, etc., required for the
complete installation of the lighting fixtures.
C.
Suitable factory cuts, drawings, or photographs (and such samples as may be
required) with full description data on all fixtures shall be submitted for approval,
copy of faxes will not be acceptable.
REFERENCES
A.
PART 2
PRODUCTS
2.01
Fixture wire shall be in strict compliance with the latest National Electrical Code-1996.
No fixture wiring shall be smaller than #l4 AWG. Wiring shall be protected with tape or
tubing at all points where abrasion is liable to occur. All wiring shall be concealed within
fixture construction.
2.02
Fluorescent lamps to be General Electric, Westinghouse or Sylvania rapid start. Energy
saving, cool white shall be used in all areas unless warm white is noted. Confirm with
Architect before ordering.
2.03
All ballasts in fluorescent fixtures shall be "High Power Factor", Class "P", and shall be as
manufactured by General Electric, Maxi-Miser II and certified ETL equal shall be
Advance or Universal, and meet the requirements of CL&P rebate program. All fixtures
marked “EMG” shall have battery back-up, (min - 2 lamps).
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
Verify all ceiling types and construction before ordering lighting fixtures to confirm that
final ceilings approved for installation and the lighting fixtures are compatible to each
16500-1
other in all respects. Supply and install any rated enclosure required to maintain the
ceiling rated at no additional cost to the owner.
3.02
Lighting fixtures shall not be installed until finished coat of paint has been applied to
ceilings and walls and allowed to dry thoroughly.
3.03
Furnish, install and wire a light fixture at every outlet as indicated on the plans. In the
event a fixture type designation is omitted from the drawing, furnish and install the type as
designated by the Architect or Engineer, fixtures shall be rated for the type of ceiling rating
installed, provide the required rated cover for the type of rated ceiling installed.
Contractor shall carry the cost for said cover.
3.04
All fixture units, when installed, shall be free from warps, dents, etc. They shall be clean
of dirt, smudges and all foreign matter, and shall be left highly polished.
3.05
All lighting fixtures shall be independently supported apart from general ceiling
construction.
3.06
Upon completion of the installation of the lighting fixtures and lighting equipment, they
must be in first-class operating condition and in perfect condition as to finish, etc. At time
of final inspection, all fixtures and equipment must be complete with lamps, starters, and
required glassware or reflectors, which must be clean and free from defects. Any fixtures,
reflectors, or glassware broken prior to the time of final inspection must be restored
without cost to the Owner. Just prior to occupancy, all fixtures shall be relamped with
new lamps, if needed.
3.07
Adjustable lighting fixtures shall be focused and adjusted as directed by the Owner or
Engineer.
3.08
Exits shall have chevron directional visible from 40 feet in all directions, and shall have
minimum 6" high and 2" wide letters (letter “I” shall be 3/4" wide), 3/8" spacing between
letters. Illuminance shall be 0.06 foot-lamberts minimum. Exit signs shall have battery
back-up power.
END OF SECTION
16500-2
SECTION 16536
SELF-CONTAINED EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.01
1.03
A.
B.
A.
B.
Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, and
maintenance and repair data under provisions of Section 16010.
PRODUCTS
A.
2.02
Conform to State Basic Building Code.
SUBMITTALS
PART 2
2.01
Emergency lighting units.
RELATED WORK
A.
1.04
B.
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.02
GENERAL
Refer to drawings for fixture schedule.
EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A.
Provide fully automatic operation on power failure. Supply 6 volt power with
minimum operating time of 1-1/2 hours with both 10 watt sealed beams on.
B.
Provide nickel cadmium battery rated at 16 ampere hours, fully automatic charger
with automatic high and low rates, built-in test switch, local sealed beam lights,
transfer relay, high rate charge indicator, battery state indicator, and mounting
16536-1
brackets.
16536-2
PART 3
3.01
3.02
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Install mounting brackets at suitable locations.
B.
Securely fasten emergency lighting unit to mounting bracket to discourage
removal.
BATTERY CHARGING
A.
After completion of installation and installation of permanent building power,
confirm full charge in all nicad battery units as follows.
1.
Fully discharge all batteries.
2.
Reconnect and permit integral charger to fully charge the battery in one
continuous operation.
3.
If power is interrupted during charging operation, discharge batteries and
proceed to fully charge from zero to full potential.
END OF SECTION
16536-3
SECTION 16720
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
A.
1.2
WORK INCLUDED
A.
1.3
1.4
All applicable provisions of the General Conditions, the Supplementary General
Conditions and Division 1 shall apply to all work in this Section.
Installation of a complete addressable fire alarm system.
RELATED WORK
A.
B.
REFERENCES
A.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:
No. 70-2008 National Electric Code (NEC)
Local and State Building Codes.
B.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:
No. 50
No. 268
No. 864
No. 268A
No. 521
No. 464
No. 38
No. 346
No. 1481
No. 1076
No. 1971
1.5
Cabinets and Boxes
Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems
Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications.
Heat Detectors for Fire Protective
Audible Signaling Appliances.
Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes.
Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
Power supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.
Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling
Systems.
Visual Notification Appliances.
C.
Local and State Building Codes.
D.
All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
SUBMITTALS
a.
General
16720-1
B.
C.
D.
E.
1.
Submit product data under provisions of section 16010.
ii.
All substitute equipment proposed as equal to the equipment specified
herein, shall meet or exceed the following standards.
Shop Drawings:
1.
Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power
requirements, equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring
point-to-point diagrams, and conduit layouts.
2.
Show main control panel module layout, configurations and terminations.
Manuals:
1.
Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and
maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s) including
technical data sheets.
2.
Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment
and the interconnections between the items of equipment.
3.
Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the
information required to properly operate the equipment and system.
4.
Approvals will be based on complete submissions of manuals together with
shop drawings.
Software Modifications
1.
Provide the services of a factory trained and authorized technician to
perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes.
Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.
2.
Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation
necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes
addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system
operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system
structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software
modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require
power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while
modifications are being made.
Certifications:
Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major
equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of installation and
16720-2
the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of
the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the
certification.
1.6
1.7
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Each and all items of the fire alarm system shall be listed as a product of a single
fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and shall bear the UL label. All control equipment shall
be listed under UL category U0JZ as a single control unit. Partial listings shall not
be acceptable. All equipment and the installation shall conform to all national,
state, and local fire codes and shall conform to NFPA 72.
B.
All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL864
requirements.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, and
connection of a microprocessor controlled, analog addressable, intelligent fire
alarm equipment required to form a complete coordinated system ready for
operation. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm
notification appliances, control panels, auxiliary control devices, annunciators,
power supplies, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
B.
The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72
for protected premises signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by
this specification. The system field wiring shall be supervised either electrically or
by software-directed polling of field devices.
C.
The system shall be an active/interrogative type system where each transponder
and/or addressable device is repetitively scanned, causing a signal to be transmitted
to the main fire alarm control panel (FACP) indicating that the device and its
associated circuit wiring is functional. Loss of this signal at the main FACP shall
result in a trouble indication as specified hereinafter for the particular input.
D.
The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company.
SYSTEM OPERATION
A.
Activation of any manual fire alarm station, heat or system smoke detector, or
waterflow switch shall cause all of the following to occur throughout the building.
Non-handicapped apartments shall have a single station smoke detector.
1.
All system audible alarm devices including those within handicapped
apartments sound continuously unit the alarm condition has been manually
acknowledged and reset. Non-handicapped apartments with single station
16720-3
smoke detectors shall only sound an alarm signal within the apartment.
2.
All system visual alarm devices to flash until the alarm condition has been
acknowledged and reset.
3.
The appropriate zone alarm LED on the panel shall be lit steadily until the
alarm condition has been acknowledged and reset.
4.
Transmit an alarm signal by a leased telephone to a central station.
5.
The appropriate zone alarm LED on the remotely located annunciator panel
shall be lit steadily until the alarm condition has been acknowledged and
reset.
6.
Return all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress.
7.
A smoke detector in any elevator lobby shall, in addition to the above
functions, return all elevators to the primary or alternate floor of egress and
activate audible/visual device inside elevator cab.
8.
Smoke detectors in the elevator machine room or top of hoistway shall
return all elevators in to the primary or alternate floor. Smoke detectors or
heat detectors installed to shut down elevator power shall do so in
accordance with ANSI A17.1 requirements and be coordinated with the
electrical contractor.
9.
Duct type smoke detectors shall, in addition to the above functions shut
down the ventilation system or close associated control dampers as
appropriate.
B.
The activation of any sprinkler supervisory tamper switch shall activate the system
supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control panel in
the remote annunciator. Differentiation between valve tamper activation and
opens and/or grounds on the initiation circuit shall be provided.
C.
Pressing the supervisory service acknowledge key shall silence the supervisory
audible signal while maintaining the supervisory service LED "on" indicating the
off normal condition.
D.
Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the supervisory service LED
to extinguish, indicating restoration to normal.
E.
Any alarms shall be displayed on an 80 character LCD display. The top line of 40
characters shall be the point label and the second line shall be the device type
identifier. The system alarm LED shall flash on the control panel and the remote
annunciator until the alarm has been acknowledged. Once acknowledged, this
same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received from another zone shall
16720-4
flash the system alarm LED on the control panel and the annunciator. The LCD
display shall show the alarm information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (Provided under separate contract)
B.
The main FACP Central Console shall be equal to NOTIFIER Model NFS-320
and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU
shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make
up the system: intelligent detectors, addressable modules, local and remote operator
terminals, printers, annunciators, and other system controlled devices. Simplex
Grinnell may substitute eqaul products on this project.
1.
B.
Function: The main FACP shall perform the following functions:
e.
Supervise and monitor all intelligent addressable detectors and
monitor modules connected to the system for normal, trouble and
alarm conditions.
f.
Supervise all initiating signaling and notification circuits
throughout the facility by way of connection to monitor and control
modules.
g.
Detect the activation of any initiating device and the location of the
alarm condition. Operate all notification appliances and auxiliary
devices as programmed.
h.
Visually and audibly annunciate any trouble, supervisory, security
or alarm condition on operator's terminals, panel display, and
annunciators.
System Capacity and General Operation
1.
The control panel shall be capable of expansion by 198 analog/addressable
devices for a maximum system capacity of 1980 points. The system shall
be capable of 2048 annunciation points per system regardless of the number
of addressable devices.
2.
The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface
control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit 80 character
liquid crystal display, individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an
alphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire
alarm system.
3.
All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be
achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm
16720-5
monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel.
4.
The FACP shall be able to provide the following features:
Block Acknowledge for Trouble Conditions
Rate Charger Control
Control-By-Time (Delay, Pulse, time of day, etc.)
Automatic Day/Night Sensitivity Adjust (high/low)
Device Blink Control (turn of detector LED strobe)
Environmental Drift Compensation (selectable ON or OFF)
Smoke Detector Pre-alarm Indication at Control Panel
NFPA 72 Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test
System Status Reports
Alarm Verification, by device, with tally
Multiple Printer Interface
Multiple CRT Display Interface
Non-Fire Alarm Module Reporting
Automatic NFPA 72 Detector Test
Programmable Trouble Reminder
Upload/Download System Database to PC Computer
One-Man Walk Test
Smoke Detector Maintenance Alert
Security Monitor Points
Alpha-numeric Pager Interface
On-line or Off-line programming
C.
Central Processing Unit
1.
The Central Processing Unit shall communicate with, monitor, and control
all other modules within the control panel. Removal, disconnection or
failure of any control panel module shall be detected and reported to the
system display by the Central Processing Unit.
2.
The Central Processing Unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event
(including ANDing, ORing, NOTing, CROSSZONEing) programs for
specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system.
Such control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile
programmable memory, and shall not be lost with system primary and
secondary power failure.
3.
The Central Processing Unit shall also provide a real-time clock for time
annotation of all system events. The time-of-day and date shall not be lost if
system primary and secondary power supplies fail.
4.
The CPU shall be capable of being programmed on site without requiring
the use of any external programming equipment. Systems that require the
use of external programmers or change of EPROMs are not acceptable.
16720-6
D.
E.
5.
The CPU and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not
be affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent with UL864
standards.
6.
Each peripheral device connected to the CPU shall be continuously scanned
for proper operation. Data transmissions between the CPU and peripheral
devices shall be reliable and error free. The transmission scheme used shall
employ dual transmission or other equivalent error checking techniques.
Display
1.
The system display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the
system operator and may also be used to program all system operational
parameters.
2.
The display assembly shall contain, and display as required, custom
alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, and
software zones.
3.
The system display shall provide an 80-character back-lit alphanumeric
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). It shall also provide five
Light-Emitting-Diodes (LEDs), that indicate the status of the following
system parameters: AC POWER, SYSTEM ALARM, SYSTEM
TROUBLE, DISPLAY TROUBLE, and SIGNAL SILENCE.
4.
The system display shall provide a 25-key touch key-pad with control
capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or
numeric information, and field programming. Two different password
levels shall be accessible through the display interface assembly to prevent
unauthorized system control or programming.
5.
The system display shall include the following operator control switches:
SIGNAL SILENCE, LAMP TEST, RESET, SYSTEM TEST, and
ACKNOWLEDGE.
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Interface Board
6.
The SLC board shall monitor and control a minimum of 198 intelligent
addressable devices. This includes 99 intelligent detectors (Ionization,
Photoelectric, or Thermal) and 99 monitor or control modules.
7.
The SLC interface board shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be
capable of operating in a local/degrade mode (any addressable device input
shall be capable of activating any or all addressable device outputs) in the
unlikely event of a failure in the main CPU.
16720-7
F.
8.
The SLC interface board shall not require any jumper cuts or address switch
settings to initialize operations.
9.
The SLC interface board shall provide power and communicate with all
intelligent addressable detectors and modules on a single pair of wires. This
SLC Loop shall be capable of operating as a NFPA Style 7 (Class A) circuit.
10.
The SLC interface board shall be able to drive an NFPA Style 4 twisted
shielded circuit up to 12,500 feet in length. The SLC Interface shall also be
capable of driving an NFPA Style 4, no twist, no shield circuit up to 3,000
feet in length. In addition, SLC wiring shall meet the listing requirements
for it to exit the building or structure. "T"-tapping shall be allowed in
either case.
11.
The SLC interface board shall receive analog information from all
intelligent detectors and shall process this information to determine whether
normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for that particular device. The
SLC interface board software shall include software to automatically
maintain the detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects
of environmental factors, including the accumulation of dust in each
detector. The analog information may also be used for automatic detector
testing and the automatic determination of detector maintenance
requirements.
Serial Interface Board (SIB)
1.
The Serial Interface Board shall provide an EIA-232 interfaces between the
fire alarm control panel and the UL Listed Electronic Data Processing
(EDP) peripherals.
2.
The SIB shall allow the use of multiple printers, CRT monitors, and other
peripherals connected to the EIA-232 ports.
3.
The Serial Interface Board shall provide one EIA-485 port for the serial
connection to annunciation and control subsystem components.
4.
The SIB shall have LEDs that will show that it is in regular communication
with annunciators or other EIA-485 connected peripheral devices.
5.
EIA-232 serial output circuits shall be optically isolated to assure protection
from earth ground.
6.
The FACP will send packets of 80 ASCII characters followed by a carriage
return (ODH) and a line feed (OAH). The external monitoring computer
shall recognize certain combinations of characters in certain locations
within the 80 character string in order to interpolate the status of the FACP.
16720-8
G.
H.
I.
Enclosures:
1.
The control panels shall be housed in a UL listed cabinet suitable for surface
or semi-flush mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected,
given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.
2.
The back box and door shall be constructed of 0.060 steel with provisions
for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top.
3.
The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other
transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. For convenience, the door
may be hinged on either the right or left side (field selectable).
4.
The control unit shall be modular in structure for ease of installation,
maintenance, and future expansion.
Power Supply:
1.
The Main Power Supply shall operate on 120/208 VAC, 50/60 Hz, and shall
provide all necessary power for the FACP.
2.
It shall provide 3.0 amps of usable notification appliance power, using a
switching 24 VDC regulator.
3.
It shall be expandable, for additional notification appliance power, in 3.0
ampere increments.
4.
It shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual-rate
charging techniques for fast battery recharge. It shall charge up to 55 Amp
Hour batteries within a 48 hour period.
5.
It shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of
detecting earth faults.
6.
It shall be power-limited per 1995 UL864 requirements.
7.
It shall provide meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current.
8.
The power supply shall be capable of charging NICAD batteries up to 32
Amp Hours.
Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT). The UDACT is an
interface for communicating digital information between a fire alarm control panel
and a UL-Listed central station.
1.
The UDACT shall be compact in size, mounting in a standard module
position of the fire alarm control cabinet. Optionally, the UDACT shall
16720-9
have the ability for remote mounting, up to 6,000 feet from the fire alarm
control panel. The wire connections between the UDACT and the control
panel shall be supervised with one pair for power and one pair for
multiplexed communication of overall system status. Systems that utilize
relay contact closures are not acceptable.
2.
The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with
voltage detect), per UL/NFPA/FCC requirements. It shall include the
ability for split reporting of panel events up to three different telephone
numbers.
3.
The UDACT shall be completely field programmable from a built-in
keypad and 4 character red, seven segment display.
4.
The UDACT shall be capable of transmitting events in at least 15 different
formats. This ensures compatibility with existing and future transmission
formats.
5.
Communication shall include vital system status such as:
_
6.
J.
Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory)
Independent Addressable Device Status
AC (Mains) Power Loss
Low Battery and Earth Fault
System Off Normal
12 and 24 Hour Test Signal
Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements)
EIA-485 Communications Failure
Phone Line Failure
The UDACT shall support independent zone/point reporting when used in
the Contact ID format. In this format the UDACT shall support
transmission of up to 2,040 points. This enables the central station to have
exact details concerning the origin of the fire or response emergency.
Field Charging Power Supply: The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a
remote 24 volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances.
1.
The FCPS shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24
volt power. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp
hour batteries and to support 60 hour standby.
2.
The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input
trigger shall be a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control
panel) or a relay. Four outputs (two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be
available for connection to the Notification devices.
16720-10
K.
L.
3.
The FCPS shall include an attractive surface mount backbox.
4.
The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC
fail delay per 1993 NFPA requirements.
5.
The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per 1995 UL standards.
System Circuit Supervision:
1.
The FACP shall supervise all circuits to intelligent devices, annunciators
and conventional peripherals and annunciate loss of communications with
these devices. The CPU shall continuously scan above devices for proper
system operation and upon loss of response from a device shall sound an
audible trouble, indicate that device or devices are not responding and print
the information in the history buffer and on a printer.
2.
Sprinkler system valves, PIV and main gate valves shall be supervised for
off-normal position.
Field Wiring Terminal Blocks:
For ease of service all wiring terminal blocks shall be the plug-in/removable type
and be capable of terminating up to 12 AWG wire. Terminal blocks that are
permanently fixed to the PC board are not acceptable.
M.
Remote Transmissions:
1.
Provide local energy or polarity reversal or trip circuits as required.
2.
The system shall be capable of operating a polarity reversal or local energy
or fire alarm transmitter for automatically transmitting fire information to
the fire department.
3.
Transmitters shall be compatible with the systems and equipment they are
connected to such as timing, operation and other required features.
N.
System Expansion: Design the main FACP and transponders so that the system can
be expanded in the future (to include the addition of twenty percent more circuits or
zones) without disruption or replacement of the existing control panel. This shall
include hardware capacity, software capacity and cabinet space.
O.
Field Programming
1.
The system shall be programmable, configurable and expandable in the
field without the need for special tools, laptop computers, or other
electronic interface equipment. There shall be no firmware changes
required to field modify the system time, point information, equations, or
16720-11
annunciator programming/information.
2.
It shall be possible to program through the standard FACP keyboard all
system functions.
P.
It shall be the responsibility of the equipment supplier /installer to ensure that all
equipment supplied will fit in locations designated on plans and in the
specifications.
Q.
Specific System Operations
1.
Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting
the sensitivity of any or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system
from the system keypad or from the keyboard of the video terminal.
Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window.
2.
Alarm Verification: Each of the Intelligent Addressable Smoke Detectors in
the system may be independently selected and enabled to be an alarm
verified detector. The alarm verification function shall be programmable
from 5 to 50 seconds and each detector shall be able to be selected for
verification during the field programming of the system or anytime after
system turn-on. Alarm verification shall not require any additional
hardware to be added to the control panel. The FACP shall keep a count of
the number of times that each detector has entered the verification cycle.
These counters may be displayed and reset by the proper operator
commands.
3.
System Point Operations:
4.
a.
Any addressable device in the system shall have the capability to be
enabled or disabled through the system keypad or video terminal.
b.
System output points shall be capable of being turned on or off from
the system keypad or the video terminal.
Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status
diagnostic functions without the need for peripheral equipment. Each point
shall be annunciated for the parameters listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Device Status.
Device Type.
Custom Device Label.
Software Zone Label.
Device Zone Assignments.
Analog Detector Sensitivity.
All Program Parameters.
16720-12
5.
System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a
status report will be generated and printed, listing all system statuses:
6.
System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall
contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 400 system
events. Each of these events will be stored, with time and date stamp, until
an operator requests that the contents be either displayed or printed. The
contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a
time, and the actual number of activations may also be displayed and or
printed.
7.
Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall
automatically interrogate each intelligent system detector and shall analyze
the detector responses over a period of time.
If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is
below or above normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode,
and the particular Intelligent Detector will be annunciated on the system
display, and printed on the optional system printer. This feature shall in no
way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require
any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.
8.
2.2
The system shall include the ability (programmable) to indicate a
"pre-alarm" condition. This will be used to alert maintenance personal
when a detector is at 80% of its alarm threshold in a 60 second period.
ADDRESSABLE DEVICES
A.
GENERAL
1.
Addressable devices shall provide an address-setting means using rotary
decimal switches.
2.
Addressable devices shall use simple to install and maintain decade
(numbered 0 to 9) type address switches. Devices which use a binary
address or special tools for setting the device address, such as a dip switch
are not an allowable substitute.
3.
Detectors shall be Analog and Addressable, and shall connect to the fire
alarm control panel's Signaling Line Circuits.
4.
Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual (2)status
LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the
detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel,
and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel,
indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. If required, the
flashing mode operation of the detector LEDs can be programmed off via
16720-13
the fire control panel program.
5.
The fire alarm control panel shall permit detector sensitivity adjustment
through field programming of the system. Sensitivity can be automatically
adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis.
6.
Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for
dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect
their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the
calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.
7.
The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock
base which includes a tamper proof feature.
8.
The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an
alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test
may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or
initiated remotely on command from the control panel.
9.
Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control
panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).
16720-14
2.3
2.4
2.5
VISUAL AND COMBINATION AUDIO/VISUAL UNITS
A.
The combination horn and light shall be separate components mounted together as
one unit. The combination unit shall be mountable on a standard four inch square
box in semi-flush mount configurations. The visual unit shall contain a 24 VDC
Xenon flasher providing a rate of 60 flashes per minute. The lens shall be clear,
tamperproof plastic with the word "FIRE" stamped in red on the front. The unit
shall reversible to allow the visual unit to be placed above or below the audible
device.
B.
The horn shall be a four inch, metal diaphragm-type horn, red, and shall operate at
24 VDC. The horn shall operate at a minimum of 93 db at ten feet.
C.
Strobe unit for bedroom shall be 110 candela flash rate and shall meet the
specifications of the ADA. The units shall be located above bed as required under
ADA. Strobe intensity shall be rated under UL 1971.
D.
Apartment mini horn/strobe units shall provide a sound pressure level of 90 dBA
minimum at 24 VDC at a distance of 10 feet. Meet all provisions of items A and C
above, candela rating to be 15/75 cd adjustable. Based on Notifier Series MIZ.
ADDRESSABLE PULL BOX (MANUAL STATION)
A.
Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the
panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable
communication module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and
shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored
to normal use except by the use of a key.
B.
All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize
a key type reset.
C.
Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating
instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the
stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches or larger.
INTELLIGENT PHOTOELECTRIC SMOKE DETECTOR
A.
2.6
The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure
smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the analog level of smoke density. Detectors installed within
handicapped apartments shall include an audible sounder.
INTELLIGENT THERMAL DETECTORS
A.
Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees
16720-15
Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees
F per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling
line circuit.
2.7
2.8
2.9
INTELLIGENT DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
A.
The in-duct smoke detector housing shall accommodate either an intelligent
ionization detector or an intelligent photoelectric detector, of that provides
continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel.
B.
When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and
appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the
rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the
duct system.
TWO WIRE DETECTOR MONITOR MODULE
A.
Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC
zone of conventional 2-wire smoke detectors or alarm initiating devices (any N.O.
dry contact device).
B.
the two-wire monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep
electrical box or with an optional surface backbox.
C.
The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An
LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the
monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control
panel.
SPRINKLER AND STANDPIPE VALVE SUPERVISORY SWITCHES:
Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser or zone control valve, and each
standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory switch.
Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped with
supervisory switches.
Each Post Indicator Valve (PIV) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a supervisory
switch.
Mount switch so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjust to
operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve control, or
when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal
position.
The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum housing, that shall provide
a 3/4 inch tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary facilities for
attachment to the valves.
16720-16
Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel.
The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a switch
operation if the housing cover is removed, or if the unit is removed from its
mounting.
Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this section and
installed by mechanical contractor.
2.10
BATTERIES AND EXTERNAL CHARGER:
A.
B.
Battery:
1.
Shall be 24 volt, Gell-Cell type.
2.
Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not
less than twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC
power failure.
3.
The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are
required. Fluid level checks refilling, spills and leakage shall not be
required.
External Battery Charger:
1.
Shall be completely automatic, with constant potential charger maintaining
the battery fully charged under all service conditions. Charger shall operate
from a 120-volt 60 hertz source.
2.
Shall be rated for fully charging a completely discharged battery within 48
hours while simultaneously supplying any loads connected to the battery.
3.
Shall have protection to prevent discharge through the charger.
4.
Shall have protection for overloads and short circuits on both AC and DC
sides.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
WIRING
A.
Conduit - Refer to Section 16111.
B.
Cable & Wire
16720-17
All fire alarm system wiring must be new and plenum rated where required..
Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (NEC Article
760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.
Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm
system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG for initiating device
circuits and signaling line circuits, and 14 AWG for notification appliance
circuits.
All wire shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with
a protective signaling system.
All wiring for the fire alarm system and/or devices shall be within metal conduit
(3/4" minimum).
The system shall permit the use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with
the multiplex communication loop.
The Radio Box shall be located adjacent to the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Installation shall conform to the local Fire Marshal’s requirements.
All field wiring shall be completely supervised. In the event of a primary power
failure, disconnected standby battery, removal of any internal modules, or
any open circuits in the field wiring; a trouble signal will be activated until
the system and its associated field wiring are restored to normal condition.
The Fire Alarm Control panel shall be capable of T-Tapping Class B (NFPA Style
4) Signaling Line Circuits. Systems which do not allow, have restrictions
to, for example, the amount of T-Taps, length of T-Taps etc., are not
acceptable.
C.
3.2
The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch
circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power
distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power
wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to
either a cold water pipe or grounding rod.
FINAL TEST
Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician
authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise
and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system.
Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for
short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.
Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the
16720-18
FACP.
Verify activation of all flow switches.
Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
Open signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.
Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal
actuates.
Ground initiating device circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
Ground signaling line circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
Ground notification appliance circuits and verify response of trouble signals.
Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.
Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors
during a walk test.
Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be
introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper
processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the
control points.
When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual
should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is
intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by
individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring,
verification functionality and similar.
3.3
GUARANTEE
A.
3.4
MAINTENANCE AGREEMENT
A.
3.5
Guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical and electrical
defects for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance.
Provide the manufacturer's yearly maintenance and testing agreement effective
from the date of final acceptance by the local authority having jurisdiction or from
the date of final commencement of beneficial use, whichever comes first. The
agreement shall include two inspections during the contract year. Provide one (1)
additional year of maintenance with two inspections during the second year.
COORDINATION
16720-19
A.
Contractor shall coordinate the installation/wiring of all multiplex devices to ensure
wiring does not violate maximum lengths allowed by circuitry.
END OF SECTION
16720-20
SECTION 16921
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS
PART 1
1.01
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
A.
Miscellaneous mechanical equipment and controls.
B.
Contractor shall wire all high voltage for all automatic controls. Division 15 shall
supply wiring diagrams for all systems.
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 16010 - General Provisions - Electrical
B.
Other Sections of Division 16.
C.
Applicable Sections of Division 15.
REFERENCES
PART 2
NFPA 70 , 1996 - National Electrical Code.
PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
A.
PART 3
3.01
WORK INCLUDED
A.
2.01
GENERAL
Refer to applicable sections of Division 16.
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
A.
Cooperate with Mechanical Contractor in connection of control circuits into
Control Terminal Cabinet.
B.
Provide remote control connection to remote devices.
C.
Provide power and all low voltage wiring to all motors, motor controls, and
mechanical components as indicated on drawings, coordinate with Division 15.
16921-1
END OF SECTION
16921-2
SECTION 16990
COMMISSIONING
PART 1
1.00
GENERAL
A.
1.02
1.03
1.04
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Testing and Adjusting of electrical systems.
B.
Certification and Demonstration of system operations and performance.
C.
Owner Instruction.
D.
Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
E.
"As-Built" Drawings.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Section 16010 - General Provisions Electrical.
B.
Section 16100 - Basic Materials and Methods.
C.
Section 16720 - Intelligent Reporting Fire Detection System
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform all testing , demonstration, etc of Fire Alarm, Call-For-Aid and similar
systems as required for the satisfaction of local officials.
B.
Perform all testing as required by the equipment manufacturers for acceptance and
guarantee of equipment.
PART 2
2.1
GENERAL
PRODUCTS
None Required.
16990-1
PART 3
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXECUTION
TESTING
A.
Refer to specific Section of the Specification governing specific equipment testing.
B.
Coordinate all testing operations with Owner and Architect. Provide sufficient
notice to all affected parties and review agencies.
C.
Provide written documentation of results from all tests performed, including
appropriate acceptance by equipment/system manufacturer and local building
and/or fire officials.
SCHEDULE AND SEQUENCE OF WORK
A.
Upon the completion of each segment or phase of work that is turned over to the
Owner for full or partial occupancy, fully test and certify each system as
operational and meeting project performance requirements.
B.
Obtain sign-off from Officials Having Jurisdiction for each system, sub-system, or
portion of work as required for Owner's use and occupation of areas of completed
work.
C.
Coordinate sequence and schedule of work with the General Contractor and
Owner's use of the building.
DOCUMENTATION
A.
Document all revisions, changes due to field conditions, etc. on a clean set of
Drawings during the construction process. Transfer this information onto the final
"as-built" documents. Refer to Section 16010 for additional requirements.
B.
Refer to Section 16010 for O & M manual and Owner instruction requirements.
C.
All documentation relating to system testing, sign-off, start-up and commissioning
exercises shall be submitted for record to the Owner and Architect. Copies of all
such documentation shall be incorporated into the project Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
END OF SECTION
16990-2

Project Specifications - Ellisdale Construction

Transcription

Similar documents

Atlantis Energy Systems Inc.

Regions CD Check Viewer Installation Guide

Downtown Tampa`s Residential Update

wozoco purmerend - Boparai Associates

Walking in Arabianranta

CheckValves

APARTMENT GREAT LOCATION TWO APPLIANCE KITCHENS

Glass instructions

HousingSF_Stenquist

Apartments (Lägenheter) Buying Furniture and